JP2020115960A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine suppressing decrease in amusement of games.SOLUTION: After an advantageous state is finished, at least over a specific period, a game machine can be controlled in a specific state and a variable display time can be set. The specific period includes a first period, a second period after the first period, and a third period after the second period. In the first period, a first variable display time can be set at a higher rate than in the second period. In the second period, a second variable display time longer than the first variable display time can be set at a higher rate than in the first period and the third period. In the third period, a third variable display time longer than the first variable display time and shorter than the second variable display time can be set at a higher rate than in the first period and the second period.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 8-1

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

There has been proposed a gaming machine that shortens the time until the decorative symbol is fixed until the variable display changes a predetermined number of times after the ST state (probability change state) (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2016-168136, A

In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, if the time until the decorative design is set to be long during the period of being controlled in the ST state in order to suppress excessive gambling property is set to be long, the big hit game state to the next big hit game state There is a risk that the time to enter will be extended and the interest in the game will decline.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that suppresses a decrease in amusement of the game.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine (such as a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can execute variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (such as a big hit gaming state),
After the end of the advantageous state, at least a specific period (for example, a period from the end of the jackpot gaming state until the variable display of the first special map or the second special map is executed a specific number of times (for example, 150 times)) A state control means (eg, high base state) that can be controlled over a specific state (eg, in the jackpot end process executed in step S117 of the special symbol process process) controls to a high base state, and shortens time control or high opening control. CPU 103 to start),
Setting means capable of setting a variable display time (for example, jackpot variation time) (for example, CPU 103 for executing the processing of steps 018AKS108 and 018AKS109);
Equipped with
The specific period is a first period (for example, a period during which the variable display of the first to the fourth special maps is executed for the first to fourth times after the end of the jackpot gaming state) and the first period A second period after (for example, a period during which the variable display of the first special diagram or the second special diagram for the fifth to 49th time is executed after the jackpot gaming state is finished) and the second period after the second period. 3 periods (for example, a period during which the variable display of the 50th to 99th first special drawing or the second special drawing is executed after the end of the big hit game state),
The setting means,
In the first period, the first variable display time (for example, the special figure variation time of the variation pattern “PC1-1”) can be set at a higher rate than in the second period (for example, the processing of steps 018AKS107 to 018AKS109 is performed. By executing, when it is determined that the hour count count value is included in the range of “1” to “4” (when it is determined that it is the first period), the first period shown in FIG. 8-8. And the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table for high base time corresponding to the fourth period, the fluctuation pattern of the big hit fluctuation is decided, and the special figure fluctuation time of the big hit fluctuation is designated as the special figure specified in the decided fluctuation pattern. CPU103 etc. which is set to the variable time),
In the second period, a second variable display time longer than the first variable display time (for example, variation patterns “PC3-1”, “PC3-2”, at a higher rate than in the first period and the third period). It is possible to set "PC4-1" to "PC4-4", "PC5-1" to "PC5-4" special figure variation time, etc.) (for example, by executing the processing of steps 018AKS107 to 018AKS109, it is possible to save time. When it is determined that the number-of-times count value is included in the range of “5” to “49” (when it is determined that it is the second period), the high base time corresponding to the second period shown in FIG. 8-9. CPU 103 which determines the variation pattern of the jackpot variation with reference to the jackpot variation pattern determination table, and sets the special figure variation time of the particular big variation to the special figure variation time specified in the determined variation pattern),
In the third period, at a higher rate than in the first period and the second period, a third variable display time longer than the first variable display time and shorter than the second variable display time (for example, variation pattern “PB3- 1", "PB3-2", "PB4-1" to "PB4-3" special figure fluctuation time, etc.) can be set (for example, by executing the processing of steps 018AKS107 to 018AKS109, the hourly count value). When it is determined that is included in the range of “50” to “99” (when it is determined that it is the third period), the high base time jackpot variation corresponding to the third period shown in FIG. 8-11. CPU103 etc. which decides the variation pattern of the big hit variation by referring to the pattern determination table and sets the special figure variation time of the big hit variation to the special figure variation time designated in the determined variation pattern),
further,
As the advantageous state, at least one of a first advantageous state (for example, 16 round big hit, probability variation big hit) and a second advantageous state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state (for example, 6 round big hit, normal big hit). A game state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to
An end time effect selecting unit (for example, an end effect selecting unit that selects a longer time period as the end effect time period at the end of the advantageous condition (for example, ending effect time) in the first advantageous state at a higher rate than in the second advantageous condition (for example, , The game control microcomputer 100, step S366 of FIG. 9-10, and FIG. 9-11),
An end-time effect execution means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control, step S772 in FIG. 9-22, and FIGS. 9-23 to 9-26) capable of executing an end-time effect (for example, ending effect) during the end-time effect period. Prepare,
The end time effect executing means is capable of executing any of a plurality of types of end time effects (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E) during the end effect time period in the first advantageous state.
An end time effect capable of accepting from the player a selection of an end time effect executed by the end time effect executing means from among a plurality of kinds of end time effects that can be executed in the end time effect period in the first advantageous state. Reception means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control, stick controller 31A, push button 31B. Other operation unit for setting may be used. Step S752A in FIG. 9-19, step S784 in FIG. 9-20, and step S784 in FIG. 9-21. The period during which the selection can be accepted may be the first half of the finish production period or the second half of the jackpot round. Specifically, in the 16R jackpot, a 13R start command is received. It may be a period from the end to the reception of the 16R end command).
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, in the first period, a refreshing feeling is generated to improve the enjoyment of the game, in the second period, excessive gambling is suppressed, and in the third period, the advantageous state to the next advantageous state. It is possible to prevent the extension of the period up to, and to suppress the deterioration of the enjoyment of the game. Further, since the period of time controlled in the advantageous state can be lengthened, it is possible to reduce the gaming value given to the player per unit period of the advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. In addition, the player can select an end effect that is executed when the advantageous state ends. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered due to the extension due to the longer period at the end of the advantageous state.

(2) Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention,
A gaming machine (such as a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can execute variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (such as a big hit gaming state),
After the end of the advantageous state, at least a specific period (for example, a period from the end of the jackpot gaming state until the variable display of the first special map or the second special map is executed a specific number of times (for example, 150 times)) A state control means (eg, high base state) that can be controlled over a specific state (eg, in the jackpot end process executed in step S117 of the special symbol process process) controls to a high base state, and shortens time control or high opening control. CPU 103 to start),
Setting means capable of setting a variable display time (for example, jackpot variation time) (for example, CPU 103 for executing the processing of steps 018AKS108 and 018AKS109);
Equipped with
The specific period is a first period (for example, a period during which the variable display of the first to the fourth special maps is executed for the first to fourth times after the end of the jackpot gaming state) and the first period A second period after (for example, a period during which the variable display of the first special diagram or the second special diagram for the fifth to 49th time is executed after the jackpot gaming state is finished) and the second period after the second period. 3 periods (for example, a period during which the variable display of the 50th to 99th first special drawing or the second special drawing is executed after the end of the big hit game state),
The setting means,
In the first period, the first variable display time (for example, the special figure variation time of the variation pattern “PC1-1”) can be set at a higher rate than in the second period (for example, the processing of steps 018AKS107 to 018AKS109 is performed. By executing, when it is determined that the hour count count value is included in the range of “1” to “4” (when it is determined that it is the first period), the first period shown in FIG. 8-8. And the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table for high base time corresponding to the fourth period, the fluctuation pattern of the big hit fluctuation is decided, and the special figure fluctuation time of the big hit fluctuation is designated as the special figure specified in the decided fluctuation pattern. CPU103 etc. which is set to the variable time),
In the second period, a second variable display time longer than the first variable display time (for example, variation patterns “PC3-1”, “PC3-2”, at a higher rate than in the first period and the third period). It is possible to set "PC4-1" to "PC4-4", "PC5-1" to "PC5-4" special figure variation time, etc.) (for example, by executing the processing of steps 018AKS107 to 018AKS109, it is possible to save time. When it is determined that the number-of-times count value is included in the range of “5” to “49” (when it is determined that it is the second period), the high base time corresponding to the second period shown in FIG. 8-9. CPU 103 which determines the variation pattern of the jackpot variation with reference to the jackpot variation pattern determination table, and sets the special figure variation time of the particular big variation to the special figure variation time specified in the determined variation pattern),
In the third period, at a higher rate than in the first period and the second period, a third variable display time longer than the first variable display time and shorter than the second variable display time (for example, variation pattern “PB3- 1", "PB3-2", "PB4-1" to "PB4-3" special figure fluctuation time, etc.) can be set (for example, by executing the processing of steps 018AKS107 to 018AKS109, the hourly count value). When it is determined that is included in the range of “50” to “99” (when it is determined that it is the third period), the high base time jackpot variation corresponding to the third period shown in FIG. 8-11. CPU103 etc. which decides the variation pattern of the big hit variation by referring to the pattern determination table and sets the special figure variation time of the big hit variation to the special figure variation time designated in the determined variation pattern),
further,
A normal state (for example, a normal state), a special state different from the advantageous state after the end of the advantageous state (for example, a probable variation state, a time saving state, a high base state), and the first advantageous state (for example, 16 round jackpot) as the advantageous state. , A probability variation big hit) and a second advantageous state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state (e.g., 6 round big hit, normal big hit), game state control means (e.g., game including CPU 103). A control microcomputer 100),
The case where the advantageous state is controlled when the special state is controlled, rather than the case where the advantageous state is controlled when the normal state is controlled (for example, a so-called big hit in the first hit) ( For example, in the case of a so-called consecutive big hit), an end time effect selecting unit (for example, a game control micro) that selects a long period at a high rate as an end effect time period (for example, ending effect time) at the end of the advantageous state. Computer 100, step S366 of FIG. 9-10, FIG. 9-11),
An end-time effect execution means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control, step S772 in FIG. 9-22, and FIGS. 9-23 to 9-26) capable of executing an end-time effect (for example, ending effect) during the end-time effect period. Prepare,
The game state control means controllable to the special state includes the state control means controllable to the specific state,
The end time effect executing means is capable of executing one of a plurality of types of end time effects (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E) during the end effect time period in the first advantageous state,
An end time effect that can be accepted from the player to select an end time effect executed by the end time effect executing means from among a plurality of kinds of end time effects that can be executed in the end effect time period of the first advantageous state. Receiving means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control, stick controller 31A, push button 31B. It may be another operation unit for setting. Step S752A in FIG. 9-19, step in FIG. 9-20, step in FIG. 9-21. S784.),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, in the first period, a refreshing feeling is generated to improve the enjoyment of the game, in the second period, excessive gambling is suppressed, and in the third period, the advantageous state to the next advantageous state. It is possible to prevent the extension of the period up to, and to suppress the deterioration of the enjoyment of the game. Further, since the period of time controlled in the advantageous state can be lengthened, it is possible to reduce the gaming value given to the player per unit period of the advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. In addition, the player can select an end effect that is executed when the advantageous state ends. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered due to the extension due to the longer period at the end of the advantageous state.

(3) Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention,
A gaming machine (such as a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can execute variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (such as a big hit gaming state),
After the end of the advantageous state, at least a specific period (for example, a period from the end of the jackpot gaming state until the variable display of the first special map or the second special map is executed a specific number of times (for example, 150 times)) A state control means (eg, high base state) that can be controlled over a specific state (eg, in the jackpot end process executed in step S117 of the special symbol process process) controls to a high base state, and shortens time control or high opening control. CPU 103 to start),
Setting means capable of setting a variable display time (for example, jackpot variation time) (for example, CPU 103 for executing the processing of steps 018AKS108 and 018AKS109);
Equipped with
The specific period is a first period (for example, a period during which the variable display of the first to the fourth special maps is executed for the first to fourth times after the end of the jackpot gaming state) and the first period A second period after (for example, a period during which the variable display of the first special diagram or the second special diagram for the fifth to 49th time is executed after the jackpot gaming state is finished) and the second period after the second period. 3 periods (for example, a period during which the variable display of the 50th to 99th first special drawing or the second special drawing is executed after the end of the big hit game state),
The setting means,
In the first period, the first variable display time (for example, the special figure variation time of the variation pattern “PC1-1”) can be set at a higher rate than in the second period (for example, the processing of steps 018AKS107 to 018AKS109 is performed. By executing, when it is determined that the hour count count value is included in the range of “1” to “4” (when it is determined that it is the first period), the first period shown in FIG. 8-8. And the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table for high base time corresponding to the fourth period, the fluctuation pattern of the big hit fluctuation is decided, and the special figure fluctuation time of the big hit fluctuation is designated as the special figure specified in the decided fluctuation pattern. CPU103 etc. which is set to the variable time),
In the second period, a second variable display time longer than the first variable display time (for example, variation patterns “PC3-1”, “PC3-2”, at a higher rate than in the first period and the third period). It is possible to set "PC4-1" to "PC4-4", "PC5-1" to "PC5-4" special figure variation time, etc.) (for example, by executing the processing of steps 018AKS107 to 018AKS109, it is possible to save time. When it is determined that the number-of-times count value is included in the range of “5” to “49” (when it is determined that it is the second period), the high base time corresponding to the second period shown in FIG. 8-9. CPU 103 which determines the variation pattern of the jackpot variation with reference to the jackpot variation pattern determination table, and sets the special figure variation time of the particular big variation to the special figure variation time specified in the determined variation pattern),
In the third period, at a higher rate than in the first period and the second period, a third variable display time longer than the first variable display time and shorter than the second variable display time (for example, variation pattern “PB3- 1", "PB3-2", "PB4-1" to "PB4-3" special figure fluctuation time, etc.) can be set (for example, by executing the processing of steps 018AKS107 to 018AKS109, the hourly count value). When it is determined that is included in the range of “50” to “99” (when it is determined that it is the third period), the high base time jackpot variation corresponding to the third period shown in FIG. 8-11. CPU103 etc. which decides the variation pattern of the big hit variation by referring to the pattern determination table and sets the special figure variation time of the big hit variation to the special figure variation time designated in the determined variation pattern),
further,
Variable display of first special identification information (for example, first special symbol) as special identification information (for example, special symbol) and second special identification information (for example, second special symbol) that is more advantageous to the player than the first special identification information. Is feasible,
First reserved storage means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, RAM 102) capable of storing information regarding variable display of the first special identification information as first reserved storage information (for example, first reserved memory),
Second holding storage means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, RAM 102) capable of storing information regarding variable display of the second special identification information as second holding storage information (for example, second holding storage);
When the first reserved storage information and the second reserved storage information are both stored, the variable display of the second special identification information based on the second reserved storage information is changed to the variable display of the first special identification information. Variable display control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 including the CPU 103, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, see FIG. 9-4) to be executed with priority over the display,
As the advantageous state, at least one of a first advantageous state (for example, 16 round big hit, probability variation big hit) and a second advantageous state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state (for example, 6 round big hit, normal big hit). A game state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to
The advantageous state is controlled when the advantageous state is controlled as a result of the variable display of the second reserved storage information, rather than when the advantageous state is controlled as a result of the variable display of the first reserved storage information. End effect selecting means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, step S366 in FIG. 9-10, FIG. 9-11) that selects a long period at a high rate as an end effect period (for example, ending effect time) at the end of. When,
An end-time effect execution means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control, step S772 in FIG. 9-22, and FIGS. 9-23 to 9-26) capable of executing an end-time effect (for example, ending effect) during the end-time effect period. Prepare,
The variable display control means includes the setting means,
The end time effect executing means is capable of executing any of a plurality of types of end time effects (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E) during the end effect time period in the first advantageous state.
An end time effect capable of accepting from the player a selection of an end time effect executed by the end time effect executing means from among a plurality of kinds of end time effects that can be executed in the end time effect period in the first advantageous state. Reception means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control, stick controller 31A, push button 31B. Other operation unit for setting may be used. Step S752A in FIG. 9-19, step S784 in FIGS. 9-20, and FIG. .) is further provided,
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, in the first period, a refreshing feeling is generated to improve the enjoyment of the game, in the second period, excessive gambling is suppressed, and in the third period, the advantageous state to the next advantageous state. It is possible to prevent the extension of the period up to, and to suppress the deterioration of the enjoyment of the game. Further, since the period of time controlled in the advantageous state can be lengthened, it is possible to reduce the gaming value given to the player per unit period of the advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. In addition, the player can select an end effect that is executed when the advantageous state ends. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered due to the extension due to the longer period at the end of the advantageous state.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
The setting means was not controlled to the advantageous state in the second period, regardless of which timing in the second period the variable display that triggers the control to the advantageous state is executed. In this case, a time equal to or longer than the length of the second period is set as the variable display time in the second period (for example, by executing the processing of steps 018AKS107 to 018AKS109, the hour/hour count value is "5" to "." When it is determined to be included in the range of “49” (when it is determined to be in the second period), the special figure variation time shown in FIG. 8-9 does not execute the jackpot variation in the second period, Variation patterns "PC3-1", "PC3-2", "PC4-1" to "PC4-4", "PC5-1" to which are longer than the length of the second period when the big hit game state is not controlled The variation pattern of the big hit variation is determined by referring to the high base time big hit variation pattern determination table corresponding to the second period in which the determination value is assigned to “PC5-4”, and the special figure variation time of the big hit variation is CPU 103 or the like for setting the special figure variation time designated in the determined variation pattern),
You may do it.
With such a configuration, no matter when the variable display that triggers the control to the advantageous state is executed at any timing in the second period, the variable display time in the second period is equal to or longer than the predetermined time. The time can be secured.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
When the advantageous state is controlled in the second period, the variable display that triggers the control to the advantageous state is displayed over the first variation period and the second variation period after the first variation period. Is feasible (for example, a jackpot variation executed during the second period is executable over the first variation period and the second variation period shown in FIG. 8-2),
It is possible to execute a first notification (for example, derivation of a display result of a variable display of the first special figure or the second special figure) indicating whether or not the advantageous state is controlled in the first fluctuation period,
Unlike the first notification, the second notification related to the advantageous state (for example, payout addition effect) can be executed in the second fluctuation period.
You may do it.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the period until the first notification indicating whether or not to be controlled in the advantageous state from being executed from being extended, and to suppress a decrease in amusement of the game. .. Further, after the first notification is executed in the first fluctuation period, the second notification is executed in the second fluctuation period, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
The specific period is a fourth period after the third period (for example, a period during which the variable display of the 100th to 150th first special drawing or the second special drawing is executed after the end of the big hit game state). In addition,
The setting means sets a fourth variable display time (for example, a first variable display time or a specific variable display time) shorter than at least the third variable display time at a rate higher than the third period in the fourth period. It is possible to set (for example, when it is determined that the time saving count value is included in the range of "100" to "150" by executing the processing of steps 018AKS107 to 018AKS109 (it is determined to be the fourth period). In the case), the fluctuation pattern of the big hit fluctuation is determined by referring to the high base time big hit fluctuation pattern determination table corresponding to the first period and the fourth period shown in FIG. 8-8, and the special figure fluctuation time of the big hit fluctuation. Is set to the special figure variation time designated in the determined variation pattern).
You may do it.
With such a configuration, in the fourth period, it is possible to prevent the period from the advantageous state to the next advantageous state to be extended, and to suppress the deterioration of the enjoyment of the game.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
Further, a detection means capable of detecting the movement of the player (for example, the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B) is provided,
In the second period, it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a payout addition effect) using the detection means.
You may do it.
According to such a configuration, by making the player participate in the effect, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

Further, modes for carrying out the invention described below include the inventions relating to the following gaming machines (8) to (19). Conventionally, in gaming machines, there are a big hit with a long ending period and a short big hit in which an ending effect of a big hit is executed, as shown in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2007-7165. There was a time choice. In the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the advantageous big hits occur consecutively, the ending period is shortened, the interval between the big hit and the next big hit is shortened, and the speed at which the prize ball is obtained is increased. Due to this, there is a possibility that the gambling property becomes too high, and in view of this point, there is a demand for a gaming machine that can prevent the gambling property from becoming too high.

(8) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
As the advantageous state, at least a first advantageous state (for example, 16 round jackpot, probability variation jackpot) and a second advantageous state (eg, 6 round jackpot, normal jackpot) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. A game state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled by any of the above,
The end effect selecting unit that selects a longer period in the first advantageous state as a finish effect period (for example, ending effect time) at the end of the advantageous state at a higher rate than in the second advantageous state ( For example, the game control microcomputer 100, step S366 of FIG. 9-10, FIG. 9-11),
End effect production means capable of executing end effect (for example, ending effect) during the end effect period (for example, effect control CPU 120, step S772 of FIG. 9-22, FIGS. 9-23 to 9-26). With and
The end time effect executing means is capable of executing one of a plurality of types of end time effects (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E) during the end effect time period in the first advantageous state,
An end time effect capable of accepting from the player a selection of an end time effect executed by the end time effect executing means from among a plurality of kinds of end time effects that can be executed in the end time effect period in the first advantageous state. Receiving means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control, stick controller 31A, push button 31B. It may be another operation unit for setting. Step S752A in FIG. 9-19, step in FIG. 9-20, step in FIG. 9-21. S784: The period in which the selection can be accepted may be the first half of the end effect period or the second half of the jackpot round. Specifically, in the 16R jackpot, a 13R start command is received. It may be a period from when the completion command of 16R is received to when the completion command of 16R is received.).

With such a configuration, the period in which the advantageous state is controlled can be lengthened, so that the gaming value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. In addition, the player can select an end effect that is executed when the advantageous state ends. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the decrease in the interest of the game due to the extension due to the longer period at the end of the advantageous state.

(9) It is possible to control to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state), and after the advantageous state ends, a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a probable variation state, a time saving state, a high base state). A controllable gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
Normal state (for example, normal state), the special state, the advantageous state, a first advantageous state (for example, 16 round big hit, probability variation big hit), and a second disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. A game state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling at least one of an advantageous state (for example, 6 rounds of big hits, a normal big hit),
The case where the advantageous state is controlled when the special state is controlled, rather than the case where the advantageous state is controlled when the normal state is controlled (for example, a so-called first hit big hit) (For example, in the case of a so-called consecutive jackpot), an end time effect selecting means (for example, an end effect selecting means for selecting a long period at a high rate as an end effect time period at the end of the advantageous state (for example, ending effect time)). The game control microcomputer 100, step S366 of FIG. 9-10, and FIG. 9-11),
End effect production means capable of executing end effect (for example, ending effect) during the end effect period (for example, effect control CPU 120, step S772 of FIG. 9-22, FIGS. 9-23 to 9-26). With and
The end time effect executing means is capable of executing one of a plurality of types of end time effects (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E) during the end effect time period in the first advantageous state,
An end time effect that can be accepted from the player to select an end time effect executed by the end time effect executing means from among a plurality of kinds of end time effects that can be executed in the end effect time period of the first advantageous state. Receiving means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control, stick controller 31A, push button 31B. It may be another operation unit for setting. Step S752A in FIG. 9-19, step in FIG. 9-20, step in FIG. 9-21. S784.) is further provided.

With such a configuration, the period in which the advantageous state is controlled can be lengthened, so that the gaming value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. In addition, the player can select an end effect that is executed when the advantageous state ends. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the decrease in the interest of the game due to the extension due to the longer period at the end of the advantageous state.

(10) First special identification information (for example, first special symbol) as special identification information (for example, special symbol) and second special identification information (for example, second) that is more advantageous to the player than the first special identification information. It is possible to execute a variable display of special symbols), and it is possible to control to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state), and a special state different from the advantageous state after the termination of the advantageous state (for example, a probability change state). , A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in a time saving state and a high base state,
First reserved storage means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, RAM 102) capable of storing information regarding variable display of the first special identification information as first reserved storage information (for example, first reserved storage);
Second reserved storage means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, RAM 102) capable of storing information regarding variable display of the second special identification information as second reserved storage information (for example, second reserved storage),
When the first reserved storage information and the second reserved storage information are both stored, the variable display of the second special identification information based on the second reserved storage information is changed to the variable display of the first special identification information. Variable display control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, see FIG. 9-4) to be executed with priority over the display,
As the advantageous state, at least a first advantageous state (for example, 16 round jackpot, probability variation jackpot) and a second advantageous state (eg, 6 round jackpot, normal jackpot) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. A game state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled by any of the above,
The advantageous state is controlled when the advantageous state is controlled as a result of the variable display of the second reserved storage information, rather than when the advantageous state is controlled as a result of the variable display of the first reserved storage information. End effect selecting means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, step S366 in FIG. 9-10, FIG. 9-) that selects a long period at a high rate as an end effect period (for example, ending effect time) at the end of 11),
End effect production means capable of executing end effect (for example, ending effect) during the end effect period (for example, effect control CPU 120, step S772 of FIG. 9-22, FIGS. 9-23 to 9-26). With and
The end time effect executing means is capable of executing one of a plurality of types of end time effects (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E) during the end effect time period in the first advantageous state,
An end time effect that can be accepted from the player to select an end time effect executed by the end time effect executing means from among a plurality of kinds of end time effects that can be executed in the end effect time period of the first advantageous state. Receiving means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control, stick controller 31A, push button 31B. It may be another operation unit for setting. Step S752A in FIG. 9-19, step in FIG. 9-20, step in FIG. 9-21. S784.) is further provided.

With such a configuration, the period in which the advantageous state is controlled can be lengthened, so that the gaming value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. In addition, the player can select an end effect that is executed when the advantageous state ends. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the decrease in the interest of the game due to the extension due to the longer period at the end of the advantageous state.

(11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (8) to (10) above,
An operation detecting means for detecting an operation by the player (for example, CPU 120 for effect control, stick controller 31A, push button 31B, step 069FS158 of FIG. 9-23) is further provided,
The end-time effect execution means executes any of a plurality of types of end-time effects in an effect mode that requires the motion detection means to detect an operation during the execution period (for example, effect pattern). All of A to effect pattern E are effect modes that accept the operation of the player).

According to such a configuration, since there is an intervention element by the player, it is possible to make it difficult to give the player a feeling of extension.

(12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (8) to (10) above,
An operation detecting means for detecting an operation by the player (for example, CPU 120 for effect control, stick controller 31A, push button 31B, step 069FS158 of FIG. 9-23) is further provided,
The end time effect executing means executes the end time effect in one of an effect mode that requires detection of a motion by the motion detecting means and an effect mode that does not require detection during the execution period (for example, effect pattern A ~ Any one of the effect patterns E may be an effect mode in which the operation of the player is not accepted).

According to such a configuration, since there is an intervention element by the player, it is possible to make it difficult to give the player a feeling of extension.

(13) In the gaming machine according to any one of (8) to (12) above,
A plurality of types of end effects are selected by the end effect reception means a predetermined number of times (for example, once or a plurality of times) until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a so-called continuous channel). (While still ending), it includes an end-time production in which selection cannot be accepted (for example, production pattern B is not selectable during continuous chanting when all songs are released). ..

According to such a configuration, a variety of effects are produced, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of delay.

(14) In the gaming machine according to any one of (8) to (13) above,
For a plurality of types of end effects, when the effect result is a specific result (for example, success), the selection is not accepted until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, until so-called consecutive chan ends). It includes an end effect that is disabled (for example, when the setting suggestion is executed, the effect pattern C is not selectable during continuous chanting).

According to such a configuration, a variety of effects are produced, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of delay.

(15) In the gaming machine of (13) or (14) above,
The plurality of types of end-time effects include end-time effects that allow new selections instead of end-time effects that make it impossible to accept selections (for example, effect pattern E is effect pattern B or When the effect pattern C is not selectable, it is made selectable).

According to such a configuration, a variety of effects are produced, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of delay.

(16) In the gaming machine according to any one of (8) to (15) above,
It is possible to accept the selection of a plurality of types of end effects, based on the fact that a release condition (for example, a condition that another effect pattern cannot be selected, a condition that a continuous change has been completed) is satisfied. Includes end effects. It should be noted that before or during the selection period in which the selection of the end effect can be accepted is started or during the selection period, the player performs a special operation (for example, a back button operation or command input, specifically, a cross). The release condition may be established according to the operation of the keys in a predetermined order, the continuous push of the push button, the input of the password, etc.).

According to such a configuration, a variety of effects are produced, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of delay.

(17) In the gaming machine according to any one of (8) to (16) above,
Further comprising setting means (for example, refer to FIG. 10-1 to FIG. 12-3) capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player,
The plurality of types of end-time effects include effects that suggest the set value set by the setting means (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-26(H), the effect pattern C suggests a set value). It is a production.)

According to such a configuration, a variety of effects are produced, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of delay.

(18) In the gaming machine according to any one of (8) to (17) above,
The plurality of types of end effects include end effects having different lengths (for example, effect patterns A to effect patterns E have different lengths),
After the execution of the end production is completed, the next variable is changed so that the period from the execution of the end production by the end production execution means to the start of the next variable display is the same. The period adjustment effect until the display is started is executed (for example, the ending effect period is longer than the effect patterns A to E, and the jackpot symbol is displayed in the extra time).

According to such a configuration, it is not necessary to adjust the period from the start of execution of the ending effect to the start of the next variable display, and the game control can be easily executed.

(19) In the gaming machine according to any one of (8) to (18) above,
The ending production period includes at least a first period and a second period after the first period has elapsed,
In the first period, a related effect (for example, introduction effect, explanation effect, effect mode selection effect) related to the effect executed in the second period is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-27, ending. An effect pattern selection period for selecting an effect pattern to be executed thereafter may be provided during the effect time.)

According to such a configuration, a variety of effects are produced, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of delay.

It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the timer interruption processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control process treatment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific period which concerns on the characteristic part 018AK. It is explanatory drawing which shows the 1st fluctuation period and the 2nd fluctuation period which concern on the characteristic part 018AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the fluctuation pattern which concerns on the characteristic part 018AK. It is a flow chart which shows an example of change pattern setting processing concerning a characteristic part 018AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the loss variation pattern determination table for low bases which concerns on the characteristic part 018AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table for low base time which concerns on the characteristic part 018AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the loss variation pattern determination table for high bases which concerns on the characteristic part 018AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the high base time big hit fluctuation pattern determination table corresponding to the 1st period and 4th period which concern on the characteristic part 018AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the high base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the 2nd period concerning the characteristic part 018AK. It is explanatory drawing which shows the special figure fluctuation time in the 2nd period concerning the characteristic part 018AK. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the high base time big hit fluctuation pattern determination table corresponding to the 3rd period which concerns on the characteristic part 018AK. It is a figure which shows the example of the production operation which concerns on the characteristic part 018AK. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the embodiment. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design normal processing. It is a figure which shows the example of determination of a special figure display result etc. It is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol stop process. It is a figure which shows a fanfare time table. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit opening pre-processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing during big hit opening. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit opening post-process. It is a figure which shows an ending time table. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit end processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control process treatment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a special figure hit waiting process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit start processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of fanfare production execution processing. It is a timing chart showing an example of fanfare production. It is a screen transition diagram showing a flow of fanfare production. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing during a round. It is the flowchart which shows ending production selection 1st processing and 2nd processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of post-round processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing after the end of a big hit. It is a flow chart which shows an example of ending production execution processing. It is a screen transition diagram showing a flow of selecting the type of ending effect. It is a timing chart showing an example of an ending effect. It is a screen transition diagram showing a flow of ending production. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the ending production in a modification. It is a flowchart which shows a setting change process. It is a flowchart which shows a setting confirmation process. It is a flow chart which shows the setting value change processing in the characteristic part 10F. 7 is a flowchart showing a set value confirmation process in the characteristic unit 10F. It is a flow chart which shows the game stop start processing in characteristic part 10F. It is a flow chart which shows the game stop end processing in characteristic part 10F. It is the figure which illustrates the production control command in feature section 40F. It is the flowchart which shows the production control main processing in the feature section 40F. It is a flow chart which shows sub side game stop processing in characteristic part 40F.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball serving as a game medium is shot into the game area by being shot from a predetermined hitting ball launching device.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the right side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1), a variable display (also called a special drawing game) of special symbols (also called a special drawing) as a plurality of types of special identification information. There is provided a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The “variable display” of the special symbol is, for example, variably displaying a plurality of types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described later). The change includes update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol or a normal symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative pattern, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scroll-displayed or updated and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. In addition, the variation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed in a blinking manner. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derived or derived display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be referred to as a variable display or a variation.

The special symbols that are variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols that are variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Further, a special figure game using the first special figure is called a "first special figure game", and a special figure game using the second special figure is also called a "second special figure game". The special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol may be one type.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special drawing game and the second special drawing game, a decorative pattern as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern (a pattern showing numbers etc.) Variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special drawing game or the second special drawing game, the decorative pattern is variably displayed (for example, up and down) in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Direction scroll display and update display). The special figure game and the variable display of the decorative design which are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is suspended and an active display corresponding to a variable display being executed. The hold display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display corresponding display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of variable displays that are suspended is also referred to as the suspended storage number. The number of reserved memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also called a first reserved memory number, and the number of reserved memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also called a second reserved memory number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B that are configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A is the number of LEDs that are turned on. The first reserved memory number is displayed by, and the second reserved indicator 25B displays the second reserved memory number according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning port which is always kept in a fixed open state through which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of prize balls are paid out and the first special figure game can be started.

The variable winning a prize ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole which changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wing pieces are in the vertical position, and thus the tip of the movable wing piece. Is close to the prize winning ball device 6A, and the game ball does not enter the second starting prize hole (the second starting prize hole is also closed). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening by the tilted position of the movable wing piece (second starting). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When the game balls enter the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the device including the electric tulip type accessory as long as it can be changed between the closed state and the open state.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four places on the lower left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning openings 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when one of the general winning openings 10 is entered, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a special winning opening is provided below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a special winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening door is a special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door (for special electric auditors) is in the off state, the big winning opening door closes the big winning opening and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning hole. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is in the on state, the special winning opening door opens the special winning opening, and the game ball easily enters the special winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the special winning opening, a predetermined number (eg, 14) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. When the game balls enter the big winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each prize hole including the general prize hole 10 is also referred to as a "prize". In particular, winning at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also called a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and variably displays the normal symbol as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a universal symbol game.

On the left side of the image display device 5, a passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, the universal figure game is executed.

Above the normal symbol display device 20, a universal symbol holding display device 25C is provided. The universal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored universal figure reserves, which is the number of ordinary figure games that are pending to be executed, by the number of LEDs that have been lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game balls and a large number of obstacle nails. At the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an outlet for taking in the game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting a sound effect and the like are provided at upper and left upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for a game effect is provided in a peripheral portion of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward a game area by a hit ball launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so that it can be supplied to a ball striking device. A ball hitting plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, there is provided a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a stick controller 31A that can be held by a player and can be tilted is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B which allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the operation (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of game progression)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the hitting ball operation handle 30 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the player. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal figure game by the normal symbol display device 20 is started. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the previous execution period of the general education game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but cannot immediately execute the general education game based on the passage) , The universal game based on the passage is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this ordinary figure game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol for a regular symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, as a fixed ordinary symbol, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (normal symbol loss symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "normal symbol defect". When the "universal figure hit" is reached, opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period (the second start winning port is opened).

When the game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters into the starting winning opening (winning prize) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed, or during the period when it is controlled to the big hitting game state or the small hitting game state to be described later (starting winning occurs, In the case where the special drawing game based on the starting prize cannot be immediately executed), the special drawing game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special figure game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later.) is displayed as a stop special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" symbol and a big hit symbol. When a predetermined special symbol different from (a small hit symbol, for example, "2") is stopped and displayed, it is a "small hit". Further, if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") is stopped and displayed, "missing" will occur.

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. After the display result in the special figure game is "small hit", the small hit game state is controlled.

In the big hit game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is one of a lapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and a timing until the number of game balls entering the special winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It continues until the earlier of the two. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the special winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also referred to as an open upper limit period hereinafter. One cycle in which the special winning opening is opened is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by entering the game ball into the special winning opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the big hit game state, and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous for the player.

The type of big hit is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and maximum open period) of the special winning opening, and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability variation state, etc., described later) are prepared, and big hits are made accordingly. The type is set. As the big hit type, a big hit type that can obtain many prize balls or a big hit type that has few prize balls or hardly obtain prize balls may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as in the big hit game state in the case of some big hit types (the number of times of opening the special winning opening is the same as the number of rounds described above, and the closing timing of the special winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the special winning opening is opened. As with the big hit type, a small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot gaming state is finished, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability changing state according to the jackpot type.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) that shortens the average special figure variation time (period during which the special figure varies) compared to the normal state is executed. In the time saving state, by shortening the average figure change time (the period during which figure changes) compared to the normal state, and improving the probability of "per figure" in the figure game from the normal state, The control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is an advantageous state for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability variation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result is "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probability variation state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it is a state in which it is likely to be a "big hit" in addition to improving the variation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability changing state are continued until one of the ending conditions such as that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times and the next big hit game state has been started. The condition that the ending condition is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as the number of times cutting (shortening of times of cutting, probability change of times of cutting etc.).

The normal state is an advantageous state such as a big hit game state that is advantageous to the player, a game state other than a special state such as a time saving state, a probability change state, etc., and the display result in the ordinary figure game is "universal figure win". Probability and probability that the display result in the special figure game is a "big hit", etc., the pachinko gaming machine 1 returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the initial setting state (for example, when the system is reset). It is in the same controlled state as when the process was not executed).

A state in which the probability variation control is executed is also referred to as a high accuracy state, and a state in which the probability variation control is not executed is also referred to as a low accuracy state. A state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and a state in which the time saving control is not executed is called a low base state. By combining these, it is said that the time saving state is a low accurate high base state, the definite change state is a high accurate high base state, and the normal state is a low accurate low base state. The highly accurate and low base state is also referred to as the highly accurate low base state.

After the small hit game state is finished, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the special figure game display result is "small hit" is continuously controlled (however, "small hit" occurs If the special figure game at that time is the predetermined number of special figure games in the above-mentioned number of times cutting, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that “small hit” may not be provided as the display result of the special figure game.

The gaming state may change based on that the game ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area in the special winning opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to be in a certain change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (notification of the progress status of the game and excitement of the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effect will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. However, in addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 is performed. May be performed by turning on/off the light, the operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

In the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" provided on the image display device 5, as the effects executed in accordance with the progress of the game, the first special figure game or the first special figure game. In response to the start of the 2 special drawing game, the variable display of the decorative design is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special figure game and the second special figure game, the fixed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) becomes the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. ) Is also stopped (displayed).

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display for a decorative pattern which is not stopped and displayed when the decorative pattern stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of a big hit combination described later. Is an aspect in which is continuing.

Further, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special drawing game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) being a “big hit” (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation degree) according to the effect mode. Different types of reach production are executed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern which is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration) The display result of the variable display of the pattern is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative pattern (for example, “7”) is stopped and displayed together on a predetermined effective line in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. ..

In the case of "probability variation jackpot" that is controlled to the probability variation state after the jackpot gaming state is finished, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" and the like) are also stopped and displayed, and after the jackpot gaming state is transformed to the probability variation state. In the case of "non-probability variation big hit (normal big hit)" which is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6" etc.) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative pattern is also referred to as a probability variation pattern, and the even-numbered decorative pattern is also referred to as a non-determination variation pattern (normal pattern). After reaching the reach mode with the non-probabilistic variation pattern, the promotion effect that finally becomes the “probability variation jackpot” may be executed.

When the display result of the special drawing game is "small hit", the fixed decorative pattern (for example, "" which is a predetermined small hit combination is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative design on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5”) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is “small hit”). As an example, the decorative patterns forming the chances are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game is "big hit" of a part of big hit type (big hit type of big hit game state similar to small hit game state) and when "small hit" A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special drawing game is “miss”, the variable display mode of the decorative design is not the reach mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (“ (Also referred to as "non-reach lost") may be displayed as a stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "non-reach lost"). Further, when the display result is "miss", after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern, a predetermined reach combination other than the jackpot combination ("reach miss") (Also referred to as) the fixed decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect that gives a notice of the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. The notice production includes a notice production that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed and a look-ahead notice production that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display in which execution is suspended). As the prefetching notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, the variable display is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative pattern, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display can be simulated like multiple variable display. You may make it perform a pseudo continuous production.

Even during the big hit game state, a big hit mid-game production for notifying the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit medium effect, an effect for notifying the number of rounds or a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit game state is improved may be executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, the small hitting medium production which notifies the small hitting game state is executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, in some big hitting type (the big hitting type of the big hitting game state of the form similar to the small hitting game state, for example, the big hitting type which makes the following game state high accuracy state) big hitting game By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not be able to know whether the present is in the small hitting game state or the big hitting game state. In such a case, by performing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is possible to distinguish between the high-accuracy state and the low-precision state. May be.

Further, for example, when the special drawing game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and progresses in the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of special figure game (including hold management), execution of general figure game (including hold management), big hit It has a function of controlling the gaming state, the small hitting gaming state, the gaming state, etc. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the function of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described below, effect control commands described below, data such as various tables referred to when making various determinations described below) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as a main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is partially or entirely stopped. Alternatively, all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts the numerical value data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display device 20, first hold) An output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the universal figure hold indicator 25C, and the like, and an output port for transmitting the signal.

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or a game ball passes) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, starting opening switch (first starting opening switch 22A and second starting opening switch 22B), count switch 23). A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on when the vehicle has entered is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as a part of the control of the progress of the game, production control board (command for designating (notifying) the progress status of the game etc.) according to the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of the special figure game (including a big hit type), a variation pattern used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later). )), a game status (for example, start and end of variable display, status of opening of big winning opening, winning of prize, number of reserved memories, game status), command for designating error, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board that is independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery.

On the effect control board 12, an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125 are mounted.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above-described function of the effect control board 12 and an effect to be executed). (Including the determination of). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The production control CPU 120 displays the execution of production based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display the effect image by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designating signal (a signal designating a sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output the sound in synchronization with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. Alternatively, a lamp signal (a signal that specifies the lighting/extinguishing state of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. In addition, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L, 8R, drives the speakers 8L, 8R based on the sound designating signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designating signal from the speakers 8L, 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

It should be noted that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control for turning on/off the lamp (supply of a sound designation signal, a lamp signal, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32). You may do it.

The random number circuit 124 updatable counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 transmits, for example, an input port for receiving the production control command transmitted from the main board 11 and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). And an output port of.

Substrates other than the main substrate 11, such as the effect control substrate 12, the sound control substrate 13, and the lamp control substrate 14, are also referred to as sub substrates. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function like the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets an interrupt prohibition (step S1). Then, necessary initial setting is performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, internal device (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.) register settings, settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control command is received, the effect control CPU 120 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized, for example, in the image display device 5.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power cut), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop time process immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 stops operating due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection processing includes processing for adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for advancing the game, the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed using the error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time when the power supply is stopped, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, the data in the RAM 102 is determined to be normal.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the variation of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

And CPU103 transmits the production control command which directs recovery from power failure to production control board 12 (Step S7). In accordance with this, a production control command for designating a backed-up game state before power interruption, and a production control for designating the display result of the special figure game being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process processing described later. When the production control CPU 120 receives the production control command that specifies the time of recovery from power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that power recovery has been performed or that power recovery is in progress. The screen is displayed to The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After completing the restoration process or the initialization process and transmitting the production control command to the production control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is taken at regular intervals (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). Then, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, and thereby the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. Whether or not the detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S21). Then, by executing a predetermined main side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 and start information (start Data such as the number of times of winning) and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times of probability change) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number updating process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, whereby the execution and suspension of the special symbol game, the control of the big hit game state and the small hit game state, the control of the game state, etc. are realized. See below).

Following the special symbol process process, a normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, and based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41), the execution and suspension management of the general figure game, It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "universal figure hit". The ordinary figure game is executed by driving the ordinary symbol display device 20, and the ordinary figure hold indicator 25C is turned on to display the number of held ordinary figure symbols.

After the normal symbol process process is executed, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the holding information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of holding memories is executed. When the start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the big hit type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as holding information. Further, a process of pre-reading a display result or a variation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of holding memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of holding memories, and the pre-reading determination is performed on the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of the starting winning prize thus set to be transmitted is, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed, the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process of the special symbol process process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting for transmitting a production control command corresponding to each process to the production control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the hold information. Also, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative pattern is "big hit" or "small hit" and the big hit type when "big hit" Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set corresponding to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. The special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). In addition, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special drawing game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order winning).

When making various decisions based on the random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process uses a random value for fluctuation pattern determination to select one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is "big hit" or "small hit". Includes processing to determine. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special figure game (special figure change time) (also the execution time of variable display of the decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern (whether there is reach, etc.), the variable display of the decorative pattern. Is specified, and is also referred to as a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". In this special symbol variation process, a process for setting for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from when the special symbol starts varying. It includes the process of measuring. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes the process to set up for. When the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "miss", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "Small hit" or "Loss", when the game is controlled to the time saving state or the probability changing state, and when the cut-out is completed, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The big hit opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This big hit opening preprocessing includes processing for starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state and setting the big winning opening in the open state based on that the display result is "big hit" Has been. When the special winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, in accordance with which the big hit type is, the upper limit opening period for opening the special winning opening and the upper limit number of times of round execution are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot opening preprocessing is completed.

The big hit opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". In this big hit opening process, the process of measuring the elapsed time after the big winning opening is opened, and the big winning opening based on the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, etc. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the open state from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The big hit opening process is ended.

The post-big hit opening process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This big jackpot post-processing, processing to determine whether the number of executions of the round to open the special winning opening has reached the set upper limit number of executions, when the maximum number of executions has been reached, the jackpot gaming state It includes the process of setting to terminate the. When the round execution count has not reached the upper limit execution count, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the round execution count reaches the upper limit execution number, the special figure process flag The value is updated to "7". After the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing is ended.

The big hit ending process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This big hit end processing, waiting processing until the waiting time corresponding to the period during which the ending effect as the effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state is executed, and the probability change corresponding to the end of the big hit game state It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the big hit ending process ends.

The small hit opening pre-processing of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the big winning opening to the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result of "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing is ended.

The small hitting open process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small hit opening process is the process of measuring the elapsed time after opening the big winning opening and the timing to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time etc. A process for determining whether or not it is included. When the timing for ending the small hitting game state is reached by returning the special winning opening to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing for opening the small hitting ends.

The small hit ending process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". The small hitting end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which a performance operation for informing the end of the small hitting game state is executed. Here, when the small hit game state ends, the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hitting game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hitting end processing ends.

(Main operation of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122 and set various initial values, and to the effect control board 12. Register setting etc. of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control processing, control for performing an initial operation of the movable body 32 such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation are executed.

Then, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on the CTC register setting, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and stands by.

On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated each time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disable, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is fetched from a predetermined input port of the input ports included in the I/O 125 that receives the control signal transmitted from the main substrate 11 via the relay substrate 15. The effect control command fetched at this time is stored in, for example, an effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to the off state (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the read effect control commands are read. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or the RAM 122 may be stored in the RAM 122 so that the effect control command received, the content specified by the effect control command, and the like can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. The reception flag provided is turned on. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, a sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and the movable body 32. The control for operating various effect devices, such as the driving operation of, is performed. Further, with respect to the control contents of the production operation using various production devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed in accordance with the production control command transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process processing of step S76, effect random number updating processing is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be executed before returning to the processing in step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process processing shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes prefetching advance notice setting processing (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice production are performed based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main board 11. Further, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols in the image display device 5, based on whether or not a command for specifying the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (the fixed decorative pattern), the variable display mode of the decorative pattern, the reach effect and various types The presence/absence of execution of various effects such as a notice effect, its mode, and execution start timing are determined. Then, the effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result or the like is set. Then, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative pattern in response to the instruction to start the variable display of the decorative pattern.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In the effect display during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. Or driving the movable body 32, outputting voice or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and sending a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect control is performed during variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating that the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed from the main board 11 is received. Corresponding to what is done, the fixed decorative design which is the display result of the decorative design is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative design is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect display processing during variable display ends.

The special figure winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "3". In the special figure winning waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is an effect control command for designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state from the main board 11. When a production control command for designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command designates the start of the big hit game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6. Update to ". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hitting game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during the small hitting. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving the command designating to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is “miss”. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the special figure hit waiting process ends.

The effect process during the small hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is "4". In the effect processing during the small hit, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set contents. .. Further, in the small hitting production process, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small winning finish production in response to receiving a command designating to end the small winning game state from the main board 11, for example. The value is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit completion production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In the small hitting end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and the small hit end effect processing is ended.

The big hit medium effect process of step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big hit mid production processing, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, a production control pattern or the like corresponding to the production contents in the big hit gaming state, and executes various production controls in the big hit gaming state based on the set contents. Further, in the big hit midfield effect process, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating termination of the big hit game state from the main board 11. It updates to "7" and finishes the big hit midfield effect process.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the big hit game state, and performs various effect controls of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and the ending effect process is ended.

(Variation of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

Although the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

What is displayed during variable display of the special symbol is only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-"), and variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinction of the symbol. Further, even when the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not have to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but a predetermined number of bets is set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, A slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player (for example, a big bonus when the stop symbol combination is a specific symbol combination when the symbols are stopped according to the operation of the stop button by The present invention can be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus).

The program and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to the form distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, and the computer device or the like in advance. It may be distributed by being installed in the storage device included in. Further, the program and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

Also, the game execution mode is not limited to that executed by mounting a removable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in the internal memory or the like. Alternatively, a hardware resource on the side of another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like may be directly used. Further, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In the present specification, one of the expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of the effect (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) is “0%”. May be included. For example, it is also included that one is a ratio of "0%" and the other is a ratio of "100%" or a ratio less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 018AK)
Hereinafter, the characteristic unit 018AK according to the present embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 8-1, the characteristic portion 018AK is configured to be controllable to a high base state (time saving state or probability changing state) as a specific state for at least a specific period after the end of the jackpot gaming state as an advantageous state. ing.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, by the special symbol normal processing executed in step S110 of the special symbol process processing, the type of big hit is a time saving state (low probability of being in a high base state after the big hit game state ends) (low accuracy). High jackpot type is controlled to the big hit type, or when the jackpot game state is determined after the jackpot game state is finished, it is decided to be a jackpot type that is controlled to the high probability base state (high accurate high base state) After that, it is controlled to a high base state for a specific period.

In the present embodiment, the period from the end of the jackpot gaming state until the variable display of the first special figure or the second special figure is executed a specific number of times is set as the specific period. In the present embodiment, the specific number of times is set to 150 times. That is, in the present embodiment, after the jackpot gaming state is finished, it can be controlled to a high base state for a period (specific period) until the variable display of the first special figure or the second special figure is executed 150 times. Has been done.

The specific period includes a first period, a second period after the first period, a third period after the second period, and a fourth period after the third period. I'm out. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the period in which the variable display of the first to fourth special maps is executed for the first to fourth times after the end of the jackpot gaming state is set as the first period. .. In addition, the period during which the variable display of the first special drawing or the second special drawing for the fifth to 49th time is executed after the end of the big hit game state is set as the second period. In addition, the period during which the variable display of the first special drawing or the second special drawing of the 50th to 99th times is executed after the jackpot gaming state is set as the third period. In addition, the period during which the variable display of the first special drawing or the second special drawing for the 100th time to the 150th time is executed after the jackpot gaming state is set as the fourth period.

In the characteristic part 018AK, it is possible to set a big hit variation time as a variable display time. The big hit variation time is the execution time of the variable display of the first special drawing or the second special drawing that results in a "big hit" display result in the special drawing game. Hereinafter, the variable display of the first special diagram or the second special diagram, in which the display result in the special figure game is “big hit”, is referred to as big hit variation. The big hit variation is a variable display of the first special figure or the second special figure that triggers the control to the big hit game state as an advantageous state. In addition, hereinafter, the variable display of the first special diagram or the second special diagram in which the display result in the special figure game is “miss” is referred to as “variation of loss”.

In the characteristic part 018AK, the big hit variation time of the big hit variation executed during the specific period is set according to which of the first to fourth periods the big hit variation is executed.

Specifically, the first variable display time is set as the big hit variation time in the first period, and the second variable display time longer than the first variable display time is set as the big hit variation time in the second period. A third variable display time that is longer than the first variable display time and shorter than the second variable display time is set as the big hit variation time in three periods, and the first variable display time is set as the big hit variation time in the fourth period. Set as. In other words, the big hit change time of the big hit change executed in the first period is set to the first variable display time, and the big hit change time of the big hit change executed in the second period is set to the second variable display time. The big hit change time of the big hit change executed in the three periods is set to the third variable display time, and the big hit change time of the big hit change executed in the fourth period is set to the first variable display time.

In the characteristic part 018AK, after the big hit variation is controlled to the big hit game state by setting the big hit variation time of the big hit variation according to which of the first to fourth periods the big hit variation is executed, The period until the big hit game state is controlled is set. That is, the longer the big hit variation time, the longer the period from being controlled to the big hit game state until the next big hit game state is controlled, and the shorter the big hit variation time is, the next big hit after being controlled to the big hit game state. The period until the game state is controlled is short. Hereinafter, the period from when the big hit game state is controlled to when the next big hit game state is controlled is called a big hit interval.

As described above, in the first period, the first variable display time shorter than the second variable display time and the third variable display time is set as the big hit variation time (the big hit variation of the big hit variation executed in the first period). Set the time to the first variable display time). According to such a configuration, by setting the big hit interval in the first period shorter than the big hit interval in the second period and the third period, a refreshing feeling can be generated and amusement of the game can be improved.

In the second period, the second variable display time, which is longer than the first variable display time and the third variable display time, is set as the jackpot variation time (the jackpot variation time of the jackpot variation executed in the second period is changed to the second variation). Set the display time). With such a configuration, by setting the big hit interval in the second period longer than the big hit interval in the first period and the third period, it is possible to suppress excessive gambling.

In the third period, the third variable display time which is longer than the first variable display time and shorter than the second variable display time is set as the big hit variation time (the big hit variation time of the big hit variation executed in the third period is Set to 3 variable display time). According to such a configuration, by setting the big hit interval in the third period to be longer than the big hit interval in the first period, excessive gambling is suppressed, and the big hit interval in the third period is set to By setting the jackpot interval shorter than that in the two periods, it is possible to prevent the jackpot interval from being extended and to suppress the deterioration of the amusement of the game.

In the fourth period, the first variable display time shorter than the second variable display time and the third variable display time is set as the big hit variation time (the big hit variation time of the big hit variation executed in the fourth period is the first variation). Set the display time). According to such a configuration, by setting the big hit interval in the fourth period shorter than the big hit interval in the second period and the third period, it is possible to prevent the big hit interval from being extended and suppress a decrease in amusement of the game. can do.

As shown in FIG. 8-2, in the characteristic part 018AK, when the big hit variation is executed in the second period and is controlled to the big hit game state, the big hit variation is changed to the first variation period and the first variation period. And the second variation period after that.

In the first variation period, the variable display of the first special map or the second special map is executed, and as a first notification indicating whether or not the jackpot gaming state is controlled, derivation of the display result of the variable display (stop) Display) is executed. Further, when the reach effect is executed, the reach effect is executed in the first variation period.

In the second fluctuation period, unlike the first notification, as a second notification related to the jackpot gaming state, a payout addition effect as a specific effect is executed. The payout addition effect is an effect that suggests that the number of prize balls to be paid out in the jackpot gaming state has increased. In other words, in the present embodiment, when the big hit variation is executed in the second period, the payout ball addition effect suggesting that the number of prize balls to be paid out in the big hit game state controlled based on the big hit variation is increased. Is executed in the second fluctuation period as the second notification.

In the present embodiment, the payout addition effect is executed by using the push button 31B as a detection unit capable of detecting the motion of the player. Specifically, when the push button 31B detects an action of repeatedly hitting the push button 31B as a predetermined action by the player, the payout addition effect is executed.

According to such a configuration, the period until the first notification (deriving the display result of the variable display of the first special map or the second special map) indicating whether or not to be controlled to the big hit game state is executed It is possible to prevent the game from being delayed, and to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, after the first notification is executed in the first fluctuation period, the second notification (ball payout addition effect) is executed in the second fluctuation period, whereby the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game by allowing the player to participate in the effect (ball-on-addition effect).

FIG. 8C illustrates a configuration example of the variation pattern related to the characteristic unit 018AK. In each variation pattern, a special figure variation time which is a variable display time of the special symbol is designated. The special figure variation time is a time required from the start of variable display of the special symbol to the stop display of the confirmed special symbol in the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Hereinafter, the special figure fluctuation time designated in one fluctuation pattern is referred to as the special figure fluctuation time of the one fluctuation pattern.

In the characteristic part 018AK, the fluctuation pattern setting process executed in step S111 of the special symbol process processing determines that the fluctuation pattern of the big hit fluctuation is one of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. Time is set. The details of the method of selecting the fluctuation pattern will be described later.

The variation patterns shown in FIG. 8-3 will be described below.

Hereinafter, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “miss” is referred to as “loss variation pattern”. Loss variation patterns include "non-reach variation pattern" (also called "non-reach variation pattern" and "non-reach variation pattern"), which corresponds to the case where the variable display result is "non-reach variation". The "reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern")" corresponding to the case where the display result of the display is "reach loss variation" is included.

A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is "big hit" or "small hit" is referred to as a "hit variation pattern". The hit variation pattern includes a “big hit variation pattern” corresponding to a variable display result of “big hit” and a “small hit variation pattern” corresponding to a variable display result of “small hit”.

There are two types of jackpot variation patterns and reach variation patterns: the "normal reach variation pattern" in which the reach effect of normal reach is executed, and the "super reach variation pattern" in which the reach effect of super reach such as super reach α or super reach β is executed. is there.

In the characteristic part 018AK, during the variable display of the decorative pattern, as one mode of the variable display effect, a sliding effect or a pseudo continuous effect realized by a variable display operation of the decorative pattern or the like can be executed. The variation patterns shown in FIG. 8-3 include variation patterns for executing the sliding effect and the pseudo-relationship effect.

In the sliding effect, after changing the decorative design in all of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, a plurality of decorative design display areas (for example, "left" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5R, etc.) After the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern at, a predetermined number (for example, "1" or "2") of decorative pattern display areas (for example, "left" decorative pattern display area) among the temporary stop displayed decorative pattern display areas. 5L and either or both of the decorative pattern display area 5R of “right”), the display is stopped after the decorative design is changed again, so that the effect display for changing the decorative design to be stopped is performed. In this way, in the sliding effect, a plurality of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed after the variable display of the decorative symbols is started until the fixed decorative symbol that is the variable display result is derived and displayed, and then the predetermined number of decorative symbols are changed. By executing the display again, there are times when the variable display state of the decorative pattern becomes the reach state and when the decorative pattern that does not reach the reach state and constitutes the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed.

In the pseudo continuous production, in response to one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special drawing game being satisfied once, the variable display of the decorative design is started, and the fixed display becomes the variable display result. By the time the design is derived and displayed, all the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, a predetermined pseudo consecutive chance or the like is part of any of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R). (Or displayed on all) is temporarily stopped and then re-variable display, which is an effect display for starting variable display of all the decorative symbols again in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, is predetermined. It can be performed once (for example, up to four times). The number of re-variable display (re-variable display number) in the pseudo continuous production is the same as the number of times (temporary stop number) in which all the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. In addition, the number of pseudo consecutives in the pseudo consecutive production is also referred to as a pseudo consecutive variation number (or a pseudo consecutive number).

Further, the variation pattern shown in FIG. 8-3 includes a variation pattern for executing the payout addition effect.

The variation pattern “PA2-1” is a non-reach (loss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is normally long. The variation pattern “PA2-2” is a non-reach (miss) variation pattern in which the sliding effect is executed. Note that the special figure change time of the change pattern "PA2-2" is longer than the special figure change time of the change pattern "PA2-1" because the sliding effect is executed. The same applies to other variation patterns in which the sliding effect is executed. The variation pattern “PA2-3” is a non-reach (miss) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once. The special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-3” is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-1” because the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed. The same applies to other variation patterns in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed.

The variation pattern “PA1-1” is a non-reach (miss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is shorter than that of the variation pattern “PA2-1”.

The variation pattern “PA3-1” is a normal reach (miss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. Further, the variation pattern “PA3-2” is a normal reach (miss) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once.

The variation pattern “PA4-1” is a super reach α (loss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is normally long. The variation pattern “PA4-2” is a super reach α (miss) variation pattern in which a pseudo-continuous variation (effect) is executed as a fake. The special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern "PA4-2" is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern "PA4-1" because the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a guise. The same applies to other variation patterns in which pseudo-repeated variation (effect) is executed as a fake. The variation pattern “PA4-3” is a super reach α (loss) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once. Further, the variation pattern “PA4-4” is a super reach α (loss) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed twice.

The variation pattern “PA5-1” is a super reach β (loss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is normally long. The variation pattern “PA5-2” is a super reach β (loss) variation pattern in which a pseudo-continuous variation (effect) is executed as a fake. The variation pattern “PA5-3” is a super reach β (loss) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once. Further, the variation pattern “PA5-4” is a super reach β (loss) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed twice.

The fluctuation pattern "PB3-1" is a normal reach (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. Further, the variation pattern “PB3-2” is a normal reach (big hit) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once.

The variation pattern “PB4-1” is a super reach α (big hit) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PB4-2” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-repeated fluctuations (effects) are executed as a guise. The variation pattern “PB4-3” is a super reach α (big hit) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once. Further, the variation pattern “PB4-4” is a super reach α (big hit) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed twice.

The fluctuation pattern “PB5-1” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. The variation pattern “PB5-2” is a super reach β (big hit) variation pattern in which pseudo-repeated variation (effect) is executed as a guise. The fluctuation pattern “PB5-3” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. Further, the variation pattern “PB5-4” is a super reach β (big hit) variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed twice.

In the variation pattern “PC1-1”, when the display result of the special drawing game is “big hit”, as the display result of the variable display of the decorative design, the fixed decorative design which is a big hit combination is “left” of the image display device 5. ], "middle", and "right" in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R is a variation pattern (also referred to as "immediate hit variation pattern") that is stopped and displayed at the same or substantially the same timing. That is, when the display result of the special drawing game is “big hit”, the variable pattern “PC1-1” which is an immediate hit variation pattern does not have the reach mode as the variable display mode of the decorative pattern but the decorative pattern of the decorative pattern. As the display result of the variable display, the fixed decorative pattern that is a combination of big hits is a variable pattern that is stopped and displayed. In the immediate hit variation pattern, the variable display mode of the decorative design may be the reach mode for an extremely short time (for example, 500 ms).

The variation pattern "PC3-1" is a normal reach (big hit) variation pattern in which the special coin variation time is a normal length when the payout addition effect is executed. In addition, the variation pattern “PC3-2” is a normal reach (big hit) variation pattern in which the payout addition effect is executed and the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once.

The variation pattern "PC4-1" is a super reach α (big hit) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length when the payout addition effect is executed. The variation pattern “PC4-2” is a super-reach α (big hit) variation pattern in which the pay-on-addition effect is executed and the pseudo-repeated variation (effect) is performed as a gambling. The variation pattern “PC4-3” is a super-reach α (big hit) variation pattern in which the payout addition effect is executed and the pseudo-repeated change (effect) is executed once. In addition, the variation pattern “PC4-4” is a super reach α (big hit) variation pattern in which the coin addition effect is executed and the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed twice.

The variation pattern "PC5-1" is a super reach β (big hit) variation pattern in which the special coin variation time is a normal length when the payout addition effect is executed. The variation pattern “PC5-2” is a super reach β (big hit) variation pattern in which the coin addition effect is executed and the pseudo-repeated variation (effect) is performed as a gambling. The variation pattern “PC5-3” is a super-reach β (big hit) variation pattern in which the payout addition effect is executed and the pseudo-repeated change (effect) is executed once. In addition, the variation pattern “PC5-4” is a super reach β (big hit) variation pattern in which the pay-out addition effect is executed and the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed twice.

FIG. 8-4 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of the special symbol process process as the variation pattern setting process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 8D, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the high base is being set (step 018AKS101). Specifically, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the high base is being performed, for example, by determining whether or not the time saving flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 is on. The time saving flag is used to perform time saving control or high opening control when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a high base state such as a time saving state (low accurate high base state) or a probability changing state (high accurate high base state). Is set to the ON state in response to, and is cleared to the OFF state in response to the end of the time saving control and the high opening control.

In the present embodiment, by the special symbol normal process executed in step S110 of the special symbol process processing, the type of big hit, big hit type that is controlled to a time saving state after the big hit game state ends, or big hit game state When the big hit type that is controlled to the probability changing state after the end is determined, in the big hit ending process executed in step S117 of the special symbol process process, the high base state is controlled, and the time saving control and the high opening control are started. To be done. When the time saving control or the high opening control in the high base state is started, the time saving flag is set to the ON state, and the time saving count value stored in the time saving counter is set to the initial value "0". To be done. The hour/hour counter is provided, for example, in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and after the end of the big hit game state, the number of times of variable display of the first special diagram or the second special diagram executed during a specific period in which the high base state is controlled. To count. In the special symbol stop process executed in step S113 of the special symbol process process, when the time saving count value is other than "150" which is a value corresponding to the specific number of times 150, the count value is 1 By updating by adding and determining whether the count value after addition becomes "150", it is determined whether or not the time saving control or the high opening control in the high base state is ended. When the hour/hour count count value reaches "150", it is determined that the high base state is to be terminated, and the hour/short flag is cleared to terminate hour/hour control or high opening control and clear the hour/hour counter. To do.

When it is determined that the high base is not in progress (the low base is in progress) (step 018AKS101; No), for example, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 is on (step 018AKS102). The big hit flag is set to the ON state in response to the determination that the display result of the special design or the decorative design is "big hit" in the special design normal process executed in step S110 of the special design process processing. .. On the other hand, the jackpot flag is set in a special symbol stop process executed in step S113 of the special symbol process process to stop and display (derive) a fixed special symbol which is a jackpot symbol as a display result of the special symbol (for example, a special symbol). It is cleared in response to the processing for performing the effect control command indicating that the display result of the figure game is “big hit” is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12). Is turned off.

When it is determined that the big hit flag is not on (off) (step 018AKS102; No), the low base time loss variation pattern determination table is selected and set as a use table for determining the variation pattern (step 018AKS103). ). Then, the variation pattern is determined by referring to the set use table based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern (step 018AKS108). Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the fluctuation pattern may be extracted from the random number circuit 104 when the process of step 018AKS is executed.

FIG. 8-5 illustrates a configuration example of the low-base time loss variation pattern determination table related to the characteristic unit 018AK. When the low base time deviation variation pattern determination table is set as the use table in the processing of step 018AKS103, the CPU 103 sets the random value MR4 for variation pattern determination to the low base time deviation variation pattern in the processing of step 018AKS108. A comparison is made with a judgment value preset in the pattern determination table. Then, the variation pattern is determined according to the determination result of which range includes the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern in the range of the determination value assigned to each variation pattern. In the low base time loss variation pattern determination table, the variation patterns “PA2-1” to “PA2-3”, “PA3-1”, “PA3-2”, “PA4-1” to “PA4-4”, Judgment values are assigned to "PA5-1" to "PA5-4". Therefore, when the low base time loss variation pattern determination table is set as the usage table, the CPU 103 refers to the low base time loss variation pattern determination table in the process of step 018AKS 108 to determine the variation pattern as follows. Variation patterns of "PA2-1" to "PA2-3", "PA3-1", "PA3-2", "PA4-1" to "PA4-4", "PA5-1" to "PA5-4" Decide on one of them.

When it is determined that the big hit flag is on (step 018AKS102; Yes), the low base time big hit variation pattern determination table is selected and set as a use table for determining the variation pattern (step 018AKS104). Then, the variation pattern is determined by referring to the set use table based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern (step 018AKS108).

FIG. 8-6 shows a configuration example of the low base time big hit variation pattern determination table related to the characteristic part 018AK. When the low base time big hit fluctuation pattern determination table is set as the use table in the processing of step 018AKS104, the CPU 103 sets the random pattern MR4 for the fluctuation pattern determination to the low base time big hit fluctuation pattern in the processing of step 018AKS108. The determination value is compared with a preset determination value in the determination table. Then, the variation pattern is determined according to the determination result of which range includes the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern in the range of the determination value assigned to each variation pattern. In the low base big hit variation pattern determination table, the variation patterns “PB3-1”, “PB3-2”, “PB4-1” to “PB4-4”, and “PB5-1” to “PB5-4” are used. A judgment value is assigned. Therefore, when the low base time jackpot variation pattern determination table is set as the use table, the CPU 103 refers to the low base time jackpot variation pattern determination table in the process of step 018AKS108 to determine the variation pattern as follows. It is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns "PB3-1", "PB3-2", "PB4-1" to "PB4-4", and "PB5-1" to "PB5-4".

On the other hand, when it is determined that the base is high (step 018AKS101; Yes), it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is on (step 018AKS105).

When it is determined that the big hit flag is not on (step 018AKS105; No), the high base time loss variation pattern determination table is selected and set as a use table for determining the variation pattern (step 018AKS106). Then, the variation pattern is determined by referring to the set use table based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern (step 018AKS108).

FIG. 8-7 shows a configuration example of the high-base time loss variation pattern determination table related to the characteristic unit 018AK. When the high-base time deviation variation pattern determination table is set as the use table in the processing of step 018AKS106, in the processing of step 018AKS108, the CPU 103 sets the random value MR4 for fluctuation pattern determination to the high-based deviation variation pattern. A comparison is made with a judgment value preset in the pattern determination table. Then, the variation pattern is determined according to the determination result of which range includes the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern in the range of the determination value assigned to each variation pattern. In the high base time loss variation pattern determination table, the determination value is assigned to the variation pattern “PA1-1”. Therefore, when the high base time loss variation pattern determination table is set as the usage table, the CPU 103 refers to the high base time loss variation pattern determination table in the processing of step 018AKS 108 to determine the variation pattern as follows. The variation pattern “PA1-1” is determined.

That is, when the loss variation is executed during the specific period controlled to the high base state, the variation pattern of the loss variation is executed in any one of the first period to the fourth period. Even if the change occurs, the variation pattern “PA1-1” is determined. In other words, when the loss variation is executed during the specific period controlled to the high base state, the execution time of the loss variation is executed in any one of the first period to the fourth period. Even when it is performed, the special figure variation time of the variation pattern “PA1-1” is set.

Therefore, the big hit change is not executed in the first to fourth periods, and the lengths of the first to fourth periods when the big hit game state is not controlled are the special figures of the change pattern "PA1-1". It is determined based on the fluctuation time. For example, when the big hit variation is not executed in the second period and is not controlled to the big hit game state (variable display of the first special figure or the second special figure executed in the second period is all deviation variation). In the case), the length of the second period is 1000 ms, which is the special figure variation time of the variation pattern “PA1-1”, and the number of times of variable display of the first special figure or the second special figure executed in the second period. It is determined to be a product of 45 and 45000 ms.

When it is determined that the big hit flag is on (step 018AKS105; Yes), the high base time big hit variation pattern determination table corresponding to any of the first period to the fourth period is selected based on the time saving count value. It is set as a use table for determining the variation pattern (step 018AKS107). Then, the variation pattern is determined by referring to the set use table based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern (step 018AKS108).

Specifically, in the process of step 018AKS107, when it is determined that the hour/hour count value is included in the range of "1" to "4" (when it is determined that it is the first period), and the hour/hour count count When it is determined that the value is included in the range of “100” to “150” (when it is determined that it is the fourth period), the high base time jackpot variation corresponding to the first period and the fourth period. The pattern determination table is selected. The high base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the first period and the fourth period is a high base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the first period and the high base time corresponding to the fourth period. It is a jackpot variation pattern determination table.

FIG. 8-8 shows a configuration example of a high base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the first period and the fourth period according to the characteristic part 018AK. When the high base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the first period and the fourth period is set as the use table in the process of step 018AKS107, the CPU 103 determines the random number value for the variation pattern determination in the process of step 018AKS108. The MR4 is compared with a determination value preset in the high base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the first period and the fourth period. Then, the variation pattern is determined according to the determination result of which range includes the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern in the range of the determination value assigned to each variation pattern.

In the high base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the first period and the fourth period, the determination value is assigned to the variation pattern “PC1-1”. Therefore, when the high base time big hit variation pattern determination table corresponding to the first period and the fourth period is set as the use table, the CPU 103 corresponds to the first period and the fourth period in the processing of step 018AKS108. The variation pattern is determined to be the variation pattern “PC1-1” by referring to the high base time jackpot variation pattern determination table.

That is, when the big hit change is executed in the first period or the fourth period, the change pattern of the big hit change is the change pattern “according to the high base time big hit change pattern determination table corresponding to the first period and the fourth period. It is determined as “PC1-1”, and the big hit change time of the big hit change is set to the special figure change time of the change pattern “PC1-1”. The special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PC1-1” corresponds to the first variable display time.

In the processing of step 018AKS107, when it is determined that the count value of hour reductions is included in the range of “5” to “49” (when it is determined that it is the second period), the high count corresponding to the second period is set. The base time jackpot variation pattern determination table is selected.

FIG. 8-9 shows a configuration example of a high-base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the second period relating to the characteristic part 018AK. In the high-base jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table corresponding to the second period, the hour/hour count value is in the range of “5” to “9”, in the range of “10” to “19”, and in the range of “20” to “20”. The determination values are assigned to different variation patterns depending on which one of the range “29”, the range “30” to “39”, and the range “40” to “49” is included. ..

When the high base big hit fluctuation pattern determination table corresponding to the second period is set as the use table in the processing of step 018AKS107, the CPU 103 sets the random value MR4 for fluctuation pattern determination to the first value in the processing of step 018AKS108. In the high base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to two periods, the determination value is compared with a preset determination value in association with the range including the hour/hour count value. Then, the variation pattern is determined according to the determination result of which range includes the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern in the range of the determination value assigned to each variation pattern.

According to such a configuration, when the big hit variation is executed in the second period, it is possible to determine the variation pattern of the big hit variation in accordance with the time saving count value and set the big hit variation time of the big hit variation. it can. In other words, when the big hit change is executed in the second period, the big hit change is executed according to the execution timing (how many times the big change is displayed during the specific period during which the big hit change is controlled to the high base state). It is possible to set the variation pattern of the big hit variation and the big hit variation time. Therefore, according to such a configuration, the player can be made to pay attention to the variation pattern of the jackpot variation, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-9, when the big hit change is executed in the second period, the special figure change time is shorter as the execution timing of the big hit change is longer (the hour-short count count value is larger). The variation pattern is determined as the variation pattern of the jackpot variation.

In the high base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the second period, the variation patterns “PC3-1”, “PC3-2”, “PC4-1” to “PC4-4”, “PC5-1” to The determination value is assigned to “PC5-4”. Therefore, when the high base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the second period is set as the use table, in the processing of step 018AKS108, the CPU 103 determines the high base time jackpot variation pattern determination corresponding to the second period. By referring to the table, the variation pattern is selected from the variation patterns “PC3-1”, “PC3-2”, “PC4-1” to “PC4-4”, and “PC5-1” to “PC5-4”. Decide on either.

That is, when the jackpot variation is executed in the second period, the variation patterns of the jackpot variation are the variation patterns “PC3-1” and “PC3-” according to the high base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the second period. 2”, “PC4-1” to “PC4-4”, and “PC5-1” to “PC5-4”, and the jackpot variation time of the jackpot variation is a characteristic of the determined variation pattern. It is set to figure fluctuation time. The special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation patterns “PC3-1”, “PC3-2”, “PC4-1” to “PC4-4”, and “PC5-1” to “PC5-4” is the second variable display time. Equivalent to.

The fluctuation patterns “PC3-1”, “PC3-2”, “PC4-1” to “PC4-4”, and “PC4-4”, to which the judgment values are assigned in the high base time jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table corresponding to the second period As shown in FIG. 8-3, “PC5-1” to “PC5-4” are all variation patterns in which the pay-out addition effect is executed.

Therefore, in the processing of step 018AKS108, the variation patterns “PC3-1”, “PC3-2”, “PC4-1” to “PC4-4”, and “PC5-1” to “PC5” according to the hour/hour count value. Regardless of which of the “-4” is determined as the variation pattern, the payout addition effect is executed. That is, when the big hit variation is executed in the second period, the payout addition effect is always executed regardless of the execution timing and the variation pattern of the big hit variation.

As described above, when the big hit variation is not executed in the second period and the big hit game state is not controlled, the length of the second period is 1000 ms which is the special figure variation time of the variation pattern “PA1-1”. , 45, which is the number of times of variable display of the first special figure or the second special figure executed in the second period, and 45000 ms. As shown in FIG. 8-10, the variation patterns “PC3-1” and “PC3-2” to which the determination value is assigned in the high base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the second period shown in FIG. 8-9. ,, "PC4-1" to "PC4-4", "PC5-1" to "PC5-4", the special figure variation time is the length of the second period when the jackpot gaming state is not controlled. It is longer than 45,000 ms.

Therefore, in the process of step 018AKS108, the variation patterns “PC3-1”, “PC3-2”, “PC4-1” to “PC4-4”, and “PC5-1” to “PC5” are selected according to the count value of the shortened times. Even if any of the "-4" is determined to be the variation pattern, the special figure variation time of these variation patterns, which is longer than the length of the second period when the jackpot gaming state is not controlled, is defined as the jackpot variation time. It is determined. That is, in the case where the big hit variation is executed in the second period, no matter which timing the big hit variation is executed in the second period, the second when the big hit game state is not controlled A time longer than the length of the period is set as the big hit variation time of the big hit variation.

With such a configuration, it is possible to secure a time longer than a predetermined time as the big hit variation time, no matter which timing the big hit variation is executed in the second period.

In the processing of step 018AKS107, when it is determined that the count value of hour reductions is included in the range of “50” to “99” (when it is determined that it is the third period), the high count corresponding to the third period. The base time jackpot variation pattern determination table is selected.

FIG. 8-11 shows a configuration example of a high-base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the third period, which is related to the characteristic part 018AK. When the high base big hitting variation pattern determination table corresponding to the third period is set as the usage table in the process of step 018AKS107, the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern determining random number MR4 in the process of step 018AKS108. It is compared with a predetermined judgment value in the high base time big hit variation pattern determination table corresponding to the third period. Then, the variation pattern is determined according to the determination result of which range includes the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern in the range of the determination value assigned to each variation pattern.

In the high base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the third period, the determination values are assigned to the variation patterns "PB3-1", "PB3-2", "PB4-1" to "PB4-3". There is. Therefore, when the high base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the third period is set as the use table, in the processing of step 018AKS108, the CPU 103 causes the high base time jackpot variation pattern corresponding to the third period. By referring to the determination table, the variation pattern is determined to be one of the variation patterns "PB3-1", "PB3-2", "PB4-1" to "PB4-3".

That is, when the jackpot variation is executed in the third period, the variation patterns of the jackpot variation are the variation patterns "PB3-1" and "PB3-" according to the high base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the third period. 2” or “PB4-1” to “PB4-3”, and the jackpot variation time of the jackpot variation is set to the special figure variation time of the determined variation pattern. The special figure fluctuation times of the fluctuation patterns "PB3-1", "PB3-2", "PB4-1" to "PB4-3" correspond to the third variable display time.

The special figure change time of the change patterns “PC3-1”, “PC3-2”, “PC4-1” to “PC4-4”, and “PC5-1” to “PC5-4” as the second variable display time is , And is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PC1-1” as the first variable display time.

Also, the special pattern change times of the variation patterns “PB3-1”, “PB3-2”, and “PB4-1” to “PB4-3” as the third variable display time are the variation patterns as the first variable display time. It is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of "PC1-1" and fluctuation patterns "PC3-1", "PC3-2", "PC4-1" to "PC4-4", "PC5-" as the second variable display time. It is shorter than the special figure variation time of "1" to "PC5-4".

After the variation pattern is determined in the processing of step 018AKS, the special figure variation time is set to the special figure variation time designated in the determined variation pattern (step 018AKS109). After executing the processing of step 018AKS109, setting for starting the fluctuation of the special symbol so as to start either the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game according to the variable special symbol designation buffer value Is performed (step 018AKS110).

The variation special figure designation buffer value is a value stored in a variation special figure designation buffer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, for example. In the present embodiment, in the start winning determination process executed in step S101 of the special symbol process processing, when the occurrence of a starting winning is detected, the game ball passes through either the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. The holding information including the starting mouth data indicating whether the player has entered (corresponding) is associated with the holding number according to the winning order (the order of detecting the gaming balls) to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening of each gaming ball. Are stored in a special figure reservation storage unit provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102. As an example, in the special figure reservation storage unit, the starting opening data indicating "1" corresponding to the winning at the first starting winning opening or "2" corresponding to the winning at the second starting winning opening is displayed. The starting opening data is stored in association with the holding number. In the special symbol normal process executed in step S110 of the special figure process processing, the pending data stored in the special figure pending storage unit in association with the pending number "1" is read, and the read pending It is determined whether the starting opening specified from the starting opening data included in the data is the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. When it is determined that the starting opening specified from the starting opening data is the first starting winning opening, the variation special map designation buffer value is updated to "1". When it is determined that the starting opening specified from the starting opening data is the second starting winning opening, the variation special map designation buffer value is updated to "2". In the processing of step 018AKS110, as an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the setting for transmitting the drive signal for updating the display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is set. To do. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the setting for transmitting the drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure on the second special symbol display device 4B is performed.

Following the processing of step 018AKS110, settings are made for transmitting various commands for starting the variation of the special symbol (step 018AKS111). After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step 018AKS112), and the variation pattern setting process is ended.

Next, an example of the production operation related to the characteristic unit 018AK will be described with reference to FIGS.

FIG. 8-12(A) is a fixed decorative pattern (“777”) that becomes a big hit combination in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. Is displayed in a stopped state, showing a state where the big hit game state is controlled. Hereinafter, in the state shown in FIG. 8-12 (A), the case where the big hit game state is controlled after the big hit game state is finished and the big hit type of big hit type is controlled to the probability variation state which is the high base state will be described as an example. ..

FIG. 8-12(B) shows a state in which the big hit game state controlled in the state shown in FIG. 8-12(A) ends and control to the probability variation state is started. In the present embodiment, after the jackpot gaming state is finished in the state shown in FIG. 8-12(B), the probability variation state is controlled over a specific period. In the state shown in FIG. 8-12(B), the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed in each of the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5. ..

FIG. 8-12(C) shows a state in which the jackpot variation is started during the specific period during which the probability variation state is controlled. In the state shown in FIG. 8-12(C), a first message image AK1 showing a message “electromagnetic projection gun BONUS” and a second message image AK2 showing a message “destruction RUSH” are displayed on the image display device 5. The effect to be displayed is started. In the state shown in FIG. 8-12(C), the first message image AK1 and the second message image AK2 are displayed on the front side of the image display device 5. After that, as shown in FIG. 8-12(D), an effect of moving the first message image AK1 and the second message image AK2 to the inner side of the image display device 5 is executed.

Hereinafter, in the state shown in FIG. 8-12(C), an example of the effect operation when the big hit variation starts in the first period or the fourth period of the specific period will be described.

As described above, when the big hit variation is executed in the first period or the fourth period, the variation pattern of the big hit variation is determined as the variation pattern “PC1-1” which is the immediate hit variation pattern. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 8-12(E), in accordance with the variation pattern “PC1-1”, the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C of “left”, “middle”, and “right” of the image display device 5, In 5R, the fixed decorative pattern (“666”) that is a big hit combination is stopped and displayed at the same or substantially the same timing.

Next, in the state shown in FIG. 8-12(C), an example of the effect operation when the big hit variation is started in the third period of the specific period will be described. Hereinafter, a case where the variation pattern of the jackpot variation is determined to be the variation pattern “PB4-1” in which the reach effect of the super reach α is executed will be described as an example.

FIG. 8-12(F) shows a state in which an effect of moving the first message image AK1 to the front side of the image display device 5 has been executed. By executing the effect shown in FIG. 8-12(F), the player is informed that the jackpot variation is being executed in the third period.

After that, as shown in FIG. 8-12(G), an effect of displaying the cut-in image AK3 on the image display device 5 is executed as the reach effect of the super reach α. After that, as shown in FIG. 8-12(H), in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” of the image display device 5, a fixed decorative pattern to be a big hit combination. (“666”) is stopped and displayed.

Next, in the state shown in FIG. 8-12(C), an example of the effect operation when the big hit variation is started in the second period of the specific period will be described. Hereinafter, a case will be described as an example in which the variation pattern of the jackpot variation is determined to be the variation pattern "PC4-1" in which the reach addition effect is executed and the reach effect of the super reach α is executed.

FIG. 8-12(I) shows a state in which an effect of moving the second message image AK2 to the front side of the image display device 5 is executed in the first fluctuation period. By executing the effect shown in FIG. 8-12(I), the player is informed that the jackpot variation is being executed in the second period.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 8-12(J), an effect of displaying the cut-in image AK3 on the image display device 5 is executed as the reach effect of the super reach α in the first fluctuation period. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-12(K), during the first fluctuation period, as the first notification, each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L of “left”, “middle”, and “right” of the image display device 5, In 5C and 5R, the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern (“666”) which is a big hit combination is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 8-12(L), in the second variation period, a payout addition effect as a specific effect is executed as the second notification. In the payout addition effect, the first character image AK4 representing the main character and the second character image AK5 representing the enemy character are displayed on the image display device 5. Further, by displaying the button image AK6 representing the push button 31B on the image display device 5, an effect that prompts the player to execute the operation of repeatedly hitting the push button 31B as a predetermined operation is executed. When the push button 31B as the detection means detects the action of repeatedly hitting the push button 31B, the main character represented by the first character image AK4 becomes the second character image AK5 as shown in FIG. The effect of attacking the enemy character represented by sword with the sword (the effect of the first character image AK4 acting on the second character image AK5) is executed. Then, the third message image AK7 indicating the message “ball payout+10” indicating that the number of payout balls has increased by 10 is displayed on the image display device 5.

As described above, in the characteristic part 018AK, the first variable display time is set as the big hit variation time in the first period, and the second variable display time longer than the first variable display time is big hit in the second period. The variation time is set, and the third variable display time, which is longer than the first variable display time and shorter than the second variable display time, is set as the big hit variation time in the third period. According to such a configuration, in the first period, a refreshing feeling is generated to improve the enjoyment of the game, in the second period, excessive gambling is suppressed, and in the third period, the advantageous state to the next advantageous state. It is possible to prevent the extension of the period up to, and to suppress the deterioration of the enjoyment of the game.

Further, in the characteristic part 018AK, when the big hit variation is executed in the second period, the big hit variation is not controlled to the big hit game state even when the big hit variation is executed at any timing in the second period. The time longer than the length of the second period in the case of being set is set as the big hit variation time of the big hit variation. With such a configuration, it is possible to secure a time longer than a predetermined time as the big hit variation time, no matter which timing the big hit variation is executed in the second period.

Further, in the characteristic unit 018AK, when the big hit variation is executed in the second period and is controlled to the big hit game state, the big hit variation is changed to the first variation period and the second variation period after the first variation period. And, over, and in the first fluctuation period, the first notification that indicates whether or not to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state is executed, and in the second fluctuation period, unlike the first notification, the jackpot game The second notification related to the state is executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the period until the execution of the first notification that indicates whether or not to be controlled in the big hit game state from being extended, and to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game. it can. Further, after the first notification is executed in the first fluctuation period, the second notification is executed in the second fluctuation period, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Further, in the characteristic portion 018AK, the first variable display time shorter than the second variable display time and the third variable display time is set as the big hit variation time in the fourth period. According to such a configuration, by setting the big hit interval in the fourth period shorter than the big hit interval in the second period and the third period, it is possible to prevent the big hit interval from being extended and suppress a decrease in amusement of the game. can do.

Further, in the characteristic part 018AK, the payout addition effect as the specific effect is executed by using the push button 31B as the detection means capable of detecting the motion of the player in the second variation period. According to such a configuration, by making the player participate in the effect, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above-mentioned embodiment, and is shown in the above-mentioned embodiment so that at least one problem in the conventional technique can be solved. It may have a part of the configuration.

In the above embodiment, the specific period is described as a period from the end of the big hit game state to the execution of the variable display of the first special figure or the second special figure a specific number of times. However, this is merely an example, and an arbitrary period can be set as the specific period.

For example, each time the variable display of the first special map or the second special map is executed, it is determined (lottery) whether or not to end the high base state as the specific state, and when the jackpot gaming state ends. The period from when it is determined that the high base state is to be ended may be set as the specific period. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the high base state is ended by the determination, and improve the interest of the game.

Alternatively, the period from the end of the big hit game state to the start of the big hit variation of the big hit type controlled by the probability change state or the time saving state as the high base state after the end of the big hit game state is set as the specific period. May be. According to such a configuration, the next high base state is controlled immediately after the high base state is ended based on the end of the specific period, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in amusement of the game.

In the above embodiment, the first variable display time is shorter than the second variable display time. However, this is only an example, and the first variable display time may be a time having a length equal to or less than the length of the second variable display time.

In the above embodiment, the third variable display time is longer than the first variable display time. However, this is merely an example, and the third variable display time may be a time having a length equal to or longer than the length of the first variable display time.

In the above embodiment, the third variable display time is shorter than the second variable display time. However, this is merely an example, and the third variable display time may be a time having a length equal to or less than the length of the second variable display time.

In the above-described embodiment, in the high base time big hit variation pattern determination table corresponding to the first period and the fourth period shown in FIG. 8-8, the variation pattern “designating the first variable display time as the special figure variation time” It has been described that the determination value is assigned only to “PC1-1”. That is, in the above-described embodiment, when the big hit variation is executed in the first period or the fourth period, the big hit variation time of the big hit variation is the special pattern of the variation pattern “PC1-1” as the first variable display time. The variable time has been described as being set at a rate of 100%.

However, this is only an example, and when the big hit variation is executed in the first period or the fourth period, the big hit variation time of the big hit variation is set to be lower than 100% (eg, 80%). The variable display time may be set. Specifically, in the high base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the first period and the high base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the fourth period, a time different from the first variable display time is specially designated. A variation pattern designated as the variation time (for example, variation patterns “PC3-1”, “PC3-2”, “PC4-1” to “PC4-4”, “PC5” that designate the second variable display time as the special figure variation time). -1" to "PC5-4", and fluctuation patterns "PB3-1", "PB3-2", "PB4-1" to "PB4-3" that specify the third variable display time as the special figure fluctuation time, etc. ) May be assigned a determination value.

In the above-mentioned embodiment, in the high base time big hit variation pattern determination table corresponding to the second period shown in FIG. 8-9, the variation pattern “PC3-1” designating the second variable display time as the special figure variation time. , "PC3-2", "PC4-1" to "PC4-4", and "PC5-1" to "PC5-4" have been described as being assigned the determination value. That is, in the above embodiment, when the big hit variation is executed in the second period, the big hit variation time of the big hit variation is the variation patterns “PC3-1”, “PC3-2” as the second variable display time, It has been described that the special figure variation times of “PC4-1” to “PC4-4” and “PC5-1” to “PC5-4” are set at a rate of 100%.

However, this is only an example, and when the big hit variation is executed in the second period, the big hit variation time of the big hit variation is set to the second variable display time at a rate lower than 100% (for example, 80%). It may be set. Specifically, in the high base time big hit variation pattern determination table corresponding to the second period, a variation pattern that specifies a time different from the second variable display time as the special figure variation time (for example, the first variable display time is specified). The variation pattern "PC1-1" designated as the figure variation time and the variation patterns "PB3-1", "PB3-2", "PB4-1" to "PB4" designating the third variable display time as the special figure variation time. -3”, etc.) may be assigned a determination value.

In the above-described embodiment, in the high base time big hit variation pattern determination table corresponding to the third period shown in FIG. 8-11, the variation pattern “PB3-1” that specifies the third variable display time as the special figure variation time. , "PB3-2", "PB4-1" to "PB4-3" have been assigned the determination values. That is, in the above embodiment, when the big hit variation is executed in the third period, the big hit variation time of the big hit variation is the variation patterns “PB3-1”, “PB3-2” as the third variable display time, The special figure change time of "PB4-1" to "PB4-3" has been described as being set at a rate of 100%.

However, this is only an example, and when the big hit change is executed in the third period, the big hit change time of the big hit change is set to the third variable display time at a rate lower than 100% (for example, 80%). It may be set. Specifically, in the high base time big hit variation pattern determination table corresponding to the third period, a variation pattern that specifies a time different from the third variable display time as the special figure variation time (for example, the first variable display time A variation pattern "PC1-1" designated as the figure variation time, and variation patterns "PC3-1", "PC3-2", "PC4-1" to "PC4" designating the second variable display time as the special figure variation time. -4”, “PC5-1” to “PC5-4”, etc.) may be assigned the determination value.

In the above embodiment, the high base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the second period shown in FIG. 8-9 and the high base time jackpot variation pattern corresponding to the third period shown in FIG. 8-11. In the determination table, it has been described that the determination value is not assigned to the variation pattern “PC1-1” that specifies the first variable display time as the special figure variation time. That is, in the above-described embodiment, when the big hit variation is executed in the second period or the third period, the big hit variation time of the big hit variation is a special figure of the variation pattern “PC1-1” as the first variable display time. It has been described that the variable time is not set (set at a rate of 0%).

However, this is only an example, and when the big hit variation is executed in the second period or the third period, the big hit variation time is changed by the first variable at a first rate higher than 0% (for example, 20%). On the other hand, when the big hit variation is executed in the first period or the fourth period while setting the display time, the big hit variation time is changed by the first variable at a second rate (eg, 100%) higher than the first rate. The display time may be set. Specifically, in the high base big hit variation pattern determination table corresponding to the second period or the high base big hit variation pattern determination table corresponding to the third period, the first variable display time is designated as the special figure variation time. In this variation pattern, the first variable display time is designated as the special figure variation time in the high base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the first period and the high base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the fourth period. A determination value smaller than the determination value assigned to the variation pattern may be assigned.

In the above embodiment, the high base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the first period and the fourth period shown in FIG. 8-8 and the high base time corresponding to the third period shown in FIG. 8-11. Variation pattern “PC3-1”, “PC3-2”, “PC4-1” to “PC4-4”, “PC5” for designating the second variable display time as the special figure variation time in the jackpot variation pattern determination table It has been described that the determination values are not assigned to "-1" to "PC5-4". That is, in the above-described embodiment, when the big hit variation is executed in the first period, the third period, or the fourth period, the big hit variation time of the big hit variation is the variation pattern “PC3-1 as the second variable display time. , "PC3-2", "PC4-1" to "PC4-4", "PC5-1" to "PC5-4" are not set in the special figure change time (set at a rate of 0%). Described as a thing.

However, this is only an example, and when the big hit variation is executed in the first period, the third period, or the fourth period, the big hit variation time is set to a third percentage higher than 0% (for example, 20%). While setting the second variable display time with, the big hit variation is executed in the second period, the big hit variation time is changed to the second variable at a fourth rate (eg, 100%) higher than the third rate. The display time may be set. Specifically, a high base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the first period, a high base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the third period, and a high base time jackpot variation pattern corresponding to the fourth period. In the determination table, the second variable display time is designated as the special figure variation time, and in the high base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the second period, the second variable display time is designated as the special figure variation time. A determination value smaller than the determination value assigned to the variation pattern may be assigned.

In the above embodiment, the high base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the first period and the fourth period shown in FIG. 8-8 and the high base time corresponding to the second period shown in FIG. 8-9. For the jackpot variation pattern determination table, the determination values for the variation patterns "PB3-1", "PB3-2", "PB4-1" to "PB4-3" that specify the third variable display time as the special figure variation time in Was described as not assigned. That is, in the above-described embodiment, when the big hit variation is executed in the first period, the second period or the fourth period, the big hit variation time of the big hit variation is the variation pattern “PB3-1 as the third variable display time. , "PB3-2", "PB4-1" to "PB4-3" are not set (set at a rate of 0%) in the special figure variation time.

However, this is only an example, and when the big hit variation is executed in the first period, the second period, or the fourth period, the big hit variation time is set to a fifth percentage higher than 0% (for example, 20%). While setting the third variable display time with, the big hit variation is executed in the third period, the big hit variation time is changed to the third variable at a sixth rate (eg, 100%) higher than the fifth rate. The display time may be set. Specifically, a high base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the first period, a high base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the second period, and a high base time jackpot variation pattern corresponding to the fourth period. In the determination table, the third variable display time is designated as the special figure variation time, and in the high base time big hit variation pattern determination table corresponding to the third period, the third variable display time is designated as the special figure variation time. A determination value smaller than the determination value assigned to the variation pattern may be assigned.

In the above-described embodiment, when the loss variation is executed during the specific period controlled to the high base state, the execution time of the loss variation is any period from the first period to the fourth period of the loss variation. Even when it is executed in the above, it is described that the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA1-1” is set. Correspondingly, in the above-described embodiment, the length of the first period to the fourth period in the case where the big hit variation is not executed in the first period to the fourth period and the big hit gaming state is not controlled, , And the variation pattern “PA1-1” is determined based on the special figure variation time.

However, this is only an example, and when the loss variation is executed during the specific period during which the high base state is controlled, the execution time of the loss variation is defined as the special figure variation time of the variation pattern “PA1-1”. May be set at different times. Specifically, in the high base time loss variation pattern determination table, the determination value may be assigned to a variation pattern that specifies a time different from the special figure variation time of the variation pattern “PA1-1” as the special figure variation time. In this case, the big hit variation is not executed in the first period to the fourth period, and the lengths of the first period to the fourth period when the big hit game state is not controlled are special figures of the determined variation pattern. It may be determined based on the changing time.

In the above embodiment, when the big hit change is executed in the second period, the big hit change is not controlled to the big hit game state regardless of which timing in the second period is executed. It has been described that the time longer than the length of the second period in the case is set as the big hit variation time of the big hit variation. However, this is merely an example, and when the big hit variation is executed in the second period, the time having a length equal to or longer than the length of the second period when the big hit game state is not controlled is the big hit. It may be set as a big hit change time of the change. Specifically, in the high base big hit variation pattern determination table corresponding to the second period, the special figure variation time is a time having a length equal to or greater than the length of the second period when the big hit game state is not controlled. The determination value may be assigned to the variation pattern designated as.

In the above-described embodiment, when the big hit variation is executed in the second period, the big hit variation time is set according to the execution timing of the big hit variation (according to the time-saving count value). However, this is only an example, and when the big hit variation is executed in the second period, the big hit variation time may be set regardless of the execution timing of the big hit variation (regardless of the count value of the shortened number of times). Good. Specifically, in the high base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the second period, the determination value may be assigned to the variation pattern regardless of the hour/hour count value.

In the above embodiment, when the big hit variation is executed in the second period, the big hit variation is executed over the first variation period and the second variation period. However, this is only an example, and when the big hit variation is executed in the second period, the big hit variation is changed to the first variation period, the second variation period, and the third variation after the second variation period. You may make it perform over a period. In this case, during the third fluctuation period, effects different from the first notification and the second notification (for example, an effect of outputting a predetermined effect sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 are emitted in a predetermined manner). You may make it perform as a 3rd notification. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

In the above-mentioned embodiment, as the second notification, it has been described that the payout addition effect is executed. However, this is merely an example, and an arbitrary effect can be executed as the second notification.

For example, when one big hit variation is executed in the second period, a pending storage corresponding to another big hit variation that has not been executed yet is stored in the special figure pending storage unit, and based on the one big hit variation. After the end of the big hit game state controlled by, the pending continuous effect suggesting that the big hit game state is controlled based on the other big hit variation is executed as the second notification in the second variation period. Good. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Alternatively, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, one of the setting values 1 to 3), and it is advantageous for the player based on the set value. The game is configured so that the degree (for example, the probability that the display result of the variable display of the first special figure game or the second special figure game is “big hit”) is different, and the big hit variation is executed in the second period. In this case, the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value set during the big hit game state controlled based on the big hit variation may be executed as the second notification in the second variation period. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

In the above-mentioned embodiment, when the big hit variation is executed in the second period, the pay-out ball addition effect is always executed. However, this is only an example, and when the big hit variation is executed in the second period, it is determined whether or not the payout ball addition effect is executed, and the payout ball addition effect is executed according to the result of the determination. You may do it. For example, a plurality of jackpot types (for example, "5R certainty variation jackpot", "10R certainty variation jackpot", "15R certainty variation jackpot", etc.) are provided, and when the jackpot variation is executed in the second period, the payout bonus addition effect is executed. Whether or not it may be determined according to the jackpot type. Specifically, depending on the type of jackpot, by determining either the variation pattern in which the payout ball addition effect is executed or the variation pattern in which the payout ball additional effect is not executed, as the fluctuation pattern, the payout ball additional effect is determined. It may be determined whether or not to execute. Alternatively, it may be determined whether or not to execute the payout addition effect by a process different from the determination of the variation pattern. That is, while the variation pattern is determined in the variation pattern setting process executed in step S111 of the special symbol process process, in the variable display start setting process performed in step S171 of the effect control process process, depending on the big hit type. It may be determined whether or not the payout addition effect is executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the payout addition effect is executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

In the above embodiment, when the big hit variation is executed in the fourth period, the big hit variation time of the big hit variation is set to the first variable display time. However, this is only an example, and when the big hit variation is executed in the fourth period, the big hit variation time of the big hit variation can be set to an arbitrary time shorter than at least the third variable display time. For example, when the big hit variation is executed in the fourth period, the big hit variation time of the big hit variation is set to a specific variable display time shorter than the third variable display time and different from the first variable display time. Good. The specific variable display time may be longer than the first variable display time or may be shorter than the first variable display time. Specifically, a high base time big hit variation pattern determination table corresponding to the first period and a high base time big hit variation pattern determination table corresponding to the fourth period are provided respectively to correspond to the fourth period. In the high base big hit variation pattern determination table, it is sufficient that the determination value is assigned to the variation pattern that specifies the specific variable display time as the special figure variation time.

When the big hit change is executed in the fourth period, the big hit change time of the big hit change may be set at a ratio of 100% to the specific variable display time. Specifically, in the high base big hit variation pattern determination table corresponding to the fourth period, the determination value may be assigned only to the variation pattern that specifies the specific variable display time as the special figure variation time. Alternatively, when the big hit variation is executed in the fourth period, the big hit variation time of the big hit variation may be set to the specific variable display time at a rate lower than 100% (for example, 80%). Specifically, in the high base time big hit variation pattern determination table corresponding to the fourth period, a variation pattern that specifies a time different from the specific variable display time as the special variable variation time (for example, the first variable display time is the special variable variation). The variation pattern "PC1-1" designated as time, and the variation patterns "PC3-1", "PC3-2", "PC4-1" to "PC4-4" designating the second variable display time as special figure variation time. , "PC5-1" to "PC5-4", fluctuation patterns "PB3-1", "PB3-2", "PB4-1" to "PB4-" that specify the third variable display time as the special figure fluctuation time. 3”, etc.) may be assigned a determination value.

When the big hit variation is executed in the first period, the second period, or the third period, the big hit variation time of the big hit variation is not set to the specific variable display time (set at a rate of 0%). You may Specifically, a high base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the first period, a high base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the second period, and a high base time jackpot variation pattern determination corresponding to the third period. In the table, the determination value may not be assigned to the variation pattern that specifies the specific variable display time as the special figure variation time. Alternatively, when the jackpot variation is executed in the first period, the second period, or the third period, the jackpot variation time is set to the specific variable display time at a seventh rate (for example, 20%) higher than 0%. On the other hand, when the big hit change is executed in the fourth period, the big hit change time may be set to the specific variable display time at an eighth ratio (eg, 100%) higher than the seventh ratio. .. Specifically, a high base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the first period, a high base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the second period, and a high base time jackpot variation pattern corresponding to the third period. In the determination table, the variation pattern that specifies the specific variable display time as the special figure variation time, and the variation pattern that specifies the specific variable display time as the special figure variation time in the high base time jackpot variation pattern determination table corresponding to the fourth period It is sufficient to assign a determination value smaller than the determination value assigned to.

In the above embodiment, the push button 32B has been described as a detection means capable of detecting the movement of the player. However, this is merely an example, and the detection means may have a configuration different from that of the push button 32B. For example, the stick controller 31A is the detection means, and the stick controller 31A as the detection means specifies in response to the detection of the pressing operation of the trigger button provided on the stick controller 31A by the player as a predetermined operation by the player. You may make it perform the ball output addition effect as an effect (the ball output additional effect as a specific effect is performed using the stick controller 31A as a detection means).

In the above-described embodiment, in the payout addition effect, an effect suggesting that the number of prize balls to be paid out has increased by 10 (the third message image AK7 shown in FIG. 8-12(L) is displayed on the image display device 5). Has been described as being performed. However, this is just an example, and when the big hit variation is executed in the second period, the number of prize balls to be paid out in the pay-out addition effect is determined by the execution timing of the big hit variation ( A corresponding effect may be executed to suggest that the number has increased by a different number. For example, when the hour count count value is included in the range of “5” to “9”, in the ball payout addition production, it is suggested that the number of prize balls to be paid out has increased by 100. When the value is included in the range of "10" to "19", it is an effect that suggests that the number of prize balls to be paid out has increased by 300 in the payout addition effect, and the time saving count value is "20". In the case of being included in the range of "-" to "29", it is suggested that the number of prize balls to be paid out has increased by 500 in the pay-out addition effect, and the time saving count value is "30" to "39". In the case of being included in the range, in the case where the number of prize balls to be paid out is increased in the payout addition effect, and the time saving count value is included in the range of “40” to “49” In addition, in the payout addition effect, an effect suggesting that the number of prize balls to be paid out has increased by 1000 may be performed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to at which timing the payout ball addition effect is executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

In the above embodiment, the big hit variation time of the big hit variation executed during the specific period is described as being set according to which of the first to fourth periods the big hit variation is executed. However, this is merely an example, and the delay variation time of the loss variation executed during the specific period is set according to which of the first period to the fourth period the loss variation is executed. May be. The loss variation time is the execution time of the variable display of the first special figure or the second special figure in which the display result in the special figure game is “miss”.

Specifically, the first variable display time is set as the loss variation time in the first period, and the second variable display time longer than the first variable display time is set as the loss variation time in the second period. A third variable display time that is longer than the first variable display time and shorter than the second variable display time is set as the loss variation time in the three periods, and the first variable display time is changed in the fourth period. Should be set as In other words, the loss variation time of the loss variation executed in the first period is set to the first variable display time, and the loss variation time of the loss variation executed in the second period is set to the second variable display time. It is sufficient to set the loss variation time of the loss variation executed in the three periods to the third variable display time, and set the loss variation time of the loss variation to be executed in the fourth period to the first variable display time.

The jackpot interval can be set by setting the loss variation time of the variation of the loss depending on which of the first period to the fourth period the variation of the loss is executed. That is, the longer the variation time of the miss, the longer the big hit interval, and the shorter the variation time of the miss, the shorter the big hit interval.

In the first period, by setting the first variable display time shorter than the second variable display time and the third variable display time as the loss variation time, the jackpot interval in the first period is set to the second period and the third period. It can be set shorter than the big hit interval to create a refreshing feeling and improve the enjoyment of the game.

In the second period, by setting the second variable display time, which is longer than the first variable display time and the third variable display time, as the loss variation time, the jackpot interval in the second period is set to the first period and the third period. It can be set longer than the big hit interval to suppress excessive gambling.

In the third period, by setting the third variable display time longer than the first variable display time and shorter than the second variable display time as the loss variation time, the big hit interval in the third period is set to the big hit interval in the first period. Set longer than this to suppress excessive gambling, set the big hit interval in the third period to be shorter than the big hit interval in the second period, and prevent the big hit interval from being extended, which is amusement of the game. The decrease can be suppressed.

In the fourth period, by setting the first variable display time shorter than the second variable display time and the third variable display time as the loss variation time, the jackpot interval in the fourth period is set to the second period and the third period. The interval can be set shorter than the big hit interval, the big hit interval can be prevented from being extended, and a decrease in the enjoyment of the game can be suppressed.

In the case where the deviation variation is executed in the fourth period, the deviation variation time of the deviation variation is set to an arbitrary time different from the first variable display time and at least shorter than the third variable display time. Good.

Any part or all of the configurations described above can be combined with each other by any method.

(Explanation of means relating to the characteristic part 018AK)
(1) The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 018AK is
A gaming machine (such as a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can execute variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (such as a big hit gaming state),
After the end of the advantageous state, at least a specific period (for example, a period from the end of the jackpot gaming state until the variable display of the first special map or the second special map is executed a specific number of times (for example, 150 times)) A state control means (eg, high base state) that can be controlled over a specific state (eg, in the jackpot end process executed in step S117 of the special symbol process process) controls to a high base state, and shortens time control or high opening control. CPU 103 to start),
Setting means capable of setting a variable display time (for example, jackpot variation time) (for example, CPU 103 for executing the processing of steps 018AKS108 and 018AKS109);
Equipped with
The specific period is a first period (for example, a period during which the variable display of the first to the fourth special maps is executed for the first to fourth times after the end of the jackpot gaming state) and the first period A second period after (for example, a period during which the variable display of the first special diagram or the second special diagram for the fifth to 49th time is executed after the jackpot gaming state is finished) and the second period after the second period. 3 periods (for example, a period during which the variable display of the 50th to 99th first special drawing or the second special drawing is executed after the end of the big hit game state),
The setting means,
In the first period, the first variable display time (for example, the special figure variation time of the variation pattern “PC1-1”) can be set at a higher rate than in the second period (for example, the processing of steps 018AKS107 to 018AKS109 is performed. By executing, when it is determined that the hour count count value is included in the range of “1” to “4” (when it is determined that it is the first period), the first period shown in FIG. 8-8. And the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table for high base time corresponding to the fourth period, the fluctuation pattern of the big hit fluctuation is decided, and the special figure fluctuation time of the big hit fluctuation is designated as the special figure specified in the decided fluctuation pattern. CPU103 etc. which is set to the variable time),
In the second period, a second variable display time longer than the first variable display time (for example, variation patterns “PC3-1”, “PC3-2”, at a higher rate than in the first period and the third period). It is possible to set "PC4-1" to "PC4-4", "PC5-1" to "PC5-4" special figure variation time, etc.) (for example, by executing the processing of steps 018AKS107 to 018AKS109, it is possible to save time. When it is determined that the number-of-times count value is included in the range of “5” to “49” (when it is determined that it is the second period), the high base time corresponding to the second period shown in FIG. 8-9. CPU 103 which determines the variation pattern of the jackpot variation with reference to the jackpot variation pattern determination table, and sets the special figure variation time of the particular big variation to the special figure variation time specified in the determined variation pattern),
In the third period, at a higher rate than in the first period and the second period, a third variable display time longer than the first variable display time and shorter than the second variable display time (for example, variation pattern “PB3- 1", "PB3-2", "PB4-1" to "PB4-3" special figure variation time, etc.) can be set (for example, by executing the processing of steps 018AKS107 to 018AKS109, the hourly count value). When it is determined that is included in the range of “50” to “99” (when it is determined that it is the third period), the high base time jackpot variation corresponding to the third period shown in FIG. 8-11. CPU103 etc. which determine the fluctuation pattern of the big hit variation by referring to the pattern determination table and set the special figure fluctuation time of the big hit variation to the special figure fluctuation time designated in the decided fluctuation pattern),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, in the first period, a refreshing feeling is generated to improve the enjoyment of the game, in the second period, excessive gambling is suppressed, and in the third period, the advantageous state to the next advantageous state. It is possible to prevent the extension of the period up to, and to suppress the deterioration of the enjoyment of the game.

(2) In the gaming machine of the above (1) related to the characteristic part 018AK,
The setting means was not controlled to the advantageous state in the second period, regardless of which timing in the second period the variable display that triggers the control to the advantageous state is executed. In this case, a time equal to or longer than the length of the second period is set as the variable display time in the second period (for example, by executing the processing of steps 018AKS107 to 018AKS109, the hour/hour count value is "5" to "." When it is determined to be included in the range of “49” (when it is determined to be in the second period), the special figure variation time shown in FIG. 8-9 does not execute the jackpot variation in the second period, Variation patterns "PC3-1", "PC3-2", "PC4-1" to "PC4-4", "PC5-1" to which are longer than the length of the second period when the big hit game state is not controlled The variation pattern of the big hit variation is determined by referring to the high base time big hit variation pattern determination table corresponding to the second period in which the determination value is assigned to “PC5-4”, and the special figure variation time of the big hit variation is CPU 103 or the like for setting the special figure variation time designated in the determined variation pattern),
You may do it.
With such a configuration, no matter when the variable display that triggers the control to the advantageous state is executed at any timing in the second period, the variable display time in the second period is equal to or longer than the predetermined time. The time can be secured.

(3) In the gaming machine of the above (1) or (2) related to the characteristic part 018AK,
When the advantageous state is controlled in the second period, the variable display that triggers the control to the advantageous state is displayed over the first variation period and the second variation period after the first variation period. Is feasible (for example, a jackpot variation executed during the second period is executable over the first variation period and the second variation period shown in FIG. 8-2),
It is possible to execute a first notification (for example, derivation of a display result of a variable display of the first special figure or the second special figure) indicating whether or not the advantageous state is controlled in the first fluctuation period,
Unlike the first notification, the second notification related to the advantageous state (for example, payout addition effect) can be executed in the second fluctuation period.
You may do it.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the period until the first notification indicating whether or not to be controlled in the advantageous state from being executed from being extended, and to suppress a decrease in amusement of the game. .. Further, after the first notification is executed in the first fluctuation period, the second notification is executed in the second fluctuation period, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (3) related to the characteristic part 018AK,
The specific period is a fourth period after the third period (for example, a period during which the variable display of the 100th to 150th first special drawing or the second special drawing is executed after the end of the big hit game state). In addition,
The setting means sets a fourth variable display time (for example, a first variable display time or a specific variable display time) shorter than at least the third variable display time at a rate higher than the third period in the fourth period. It is possible to set (for example, when it is determined that the time saving count value is included in the range of "100" to "150" by executing the processing of steps 018AKS107 to 018AKS109 (it is determined to be the fourth period). In the case), the fluctuation pattern of the big hit fluctuation is determined by referring to the high base time big hit fluctuation pattern determination table corresponding to the first period and the fourth period shown in FIG. 8-8, and the special figure fluctuation time of the big hit fluctuation. Is set to the special figure variation time designated in the determined variation pattern).
You may do it.
With such a configuration, in the fourth period, it is possible to prevent the period from the advantageous state to the next advantageous state to be extended, and to suppress the deterioration of the enjoyment of the game.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (4) related to the characteristic part 018AK,
Further, a detection means capable of detecting the movement of the player (for example, the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B) is provided,
In the second period, it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a payout addition effect) using the detection means.
You may do it.
According to such a configuration, by making the player participate in the effect, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes and additions within the scope not departing from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other examples of the embodiments described later.

In addition, all or part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification and the configurations shown in the below-described embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be understood that the above-described embodiment and the below-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplifications in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description and the following description, but by the claims, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the claims and all modifications within the scope.

In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is a gaming machine (such as a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can execute variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (such as a big hit gaming state). Then, after the end of the advantageous state, at least a specific period (for example, a period from the end of the jackpot gaming state until the variable display of the first special map or the second special map is executed a specific number of times (for example, 150 times)) In the jackpot end process executed in step S117 of the special symbol process process, which can be controlled to a specific state (for example, a high base state), the high base state is controlled, and time saving control and high opening are performed. The CPU 103 for starting the control) and a setting means (for example, the CPU 103 for executing the processing of steps 018AKS108 and 018AKS109) capable of setting the variable display time (for example, the jackpot change time), and the specific period is One period (for example, a period during which the variable display of the first to fourth special maps is executed for the first to fourth times after the end of the big hit game state) and the second period after the first period ( For example, after the end of the big hit game state, a period during which the variable display of the first to the second special maps is executed for the fifth to 49th times, and the third period after the second period (for example, the big hit game) After the end of the state, the variable display of the 50th to 99th first special drawing or the second special drawing is performed), and the setting means is configured to change from the second period in the first period. It is also possible to set the first variable display time (for example, the special figure variation time of the variation pattern “PC1-1”) at a high rate (for example, by executing the processing of steps 018AKS107 to 018AKS109, the hourly count value is reduced). When it is determined to be included in the range of “1” to “4” (when it is determined to be the first period), the high base time corresponding to the first period and the fourth period shown in FIG. 8-8. CPU 103 or the like, which determines the variation pattern of the jackpot variation with reference to the jackpot variation pattern determination table, and sets the special figure variation time of the big hit variation to the special figure variation time designated in the determined variation pattern), In the second period, the second variable display time (for example, variation patterns “PC3-1”, “PC3-2”, “PC3-2”, “PC3-2”, which is longer than the first variable display time at a higher rate than the first period and the third period). It is possible to set the special figure variation time of "PC4-1" to "PC4-4" and "PC5-1" to "PC5-4" (for example, step 018A). When it is determined that the hour count count value is included in the range of “5” to “49” by executing the processing of KS107 to 018AKS109 (when it is determined to be the second period), The fluctuation pattern of the big hit fluctuation is determined with reference to the high base time big hit fluctuation pattern determination table corresponding to the second period shown in 9, and the special figure fluctuation time of the big hit fluctuation is designated in the decided fluctuation pattern. The CPU 103, etc., which sets the special figure variation time), is higher than the first period and the second period in the third period, and is longer than the first variable display time and shorter than the second variable display time. It is possible to set 3 variable display times (for example, special pattern variation times of variation patterns "PB3-1", "PB3-2", "PB4-1" to "PB4-3", etc.) (for example, in steps 018AKS107 to 018AKS109). By executing the process, when it is determined that the hour count count value is included in the range of “50” to “99” (when it is determined that it is the third period), the number shown in FIG. The fluctuation pattern of the big hit fluctuation is determined by referring to the high base time big hit fluctuation pattern determination table corresponding to the three periods, and the special fluctuation time of the big hit fluctuation is designated as the special fluctuation time specified in the determined fluctuation pattern. CPU 103, etc.), further, as the advantageous state, a first advantageous state (for example, 16 round jackpot, probability variation jackpot), and a second advantageous state (eg, 6 round jackpot) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. , A normal big hit) and a game state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to at least one of them, and the first advantageous state ends the advantageous state more than the second advantageous state. And an end time effect selecting means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100, step S366 in FIG. 9-10, FIG. 9-11) that selects a long period at a high rate as an end time effect time period (for example, ending effect time). , An end time effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120, step S772 in FIG. 9-22, and FIG. 9-23 to FIG. 9-26) capable of executing an end time effect (for example, ending effect) in the end time effect period. The end effect production executing means is capable of executing any one of a plurality of types of end effect (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E) in the end effect period of the first advantageous state. , During the finish production period of the first advantageous state End effect receiving means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control, stick controller) capable of accepting the selection of the end effect executed by the end effect executing means from the plurality of end effects that can be executed by the player. 31A, push button 31B. It may be another operation unit for setting. Step S752A in FIG. 9-19, step S784 in FIG. 9-20, and step S784 in FIG. 9-21. The period in which the selection can be accepted may be the first half of the finish production period or the second half of the big hit round. Specifically, in the 16R jackpot, it may be a period from the reception of the 13R start command to the reception of the 16R end command. ) Is further provided with a gaming machine.

According to such a configuration, in the first period, a refreshing feeling is generated to improve the enjoyment of the game, in the second period, excessive gambling is suppressed, and in the third period, the advantageous state to the next advantageous state. It is possible to prevent the extension of the period up to, and to suppress the deterioration of the enjoyment of the game. Further, since the period of time controlled in the advantageous state can be lengthened, it is possible to reduce the gaming value given to the player per unit period of the advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. In addition, the player can select an end effect that is executed when the advantageous state ends. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the decrease in the interest of the game due to the extension due to the longer period at the end of the advantageous state.

That is, in both the specific state (special state) after the end of the advantageous state and the first advantageous state as the advantageous state, excessive gambling can be suppressed, and the period from the advantageous state to the next advantageous state or the advantageous state There is an excellent effect that it is possible to reduce the deterioration of the interest of the game due to the extension due to the longer period at the end of.

Further, as the gaming machine of the present invention, in addition, a gaming machine that can execute variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state) (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) In addition, after the end of the advantageous state, at least until a specific period (for example, after the jackpot gaming state ends, a variable display of the first special map or the second special map is executed a specific number of times (for example, 150 times)) In the jackpot end process executed in step S117 of the special symbol process process that can be controlled to a specific state (for example, a high base state) over a period of time), control to a high base state, and time saving control or The CPU 103 for starting the high opening control) and a setting means (for example, the CPU 103 for executing the processing of steps 018AKS108 and 018AKS109) capable of setting a variable display time (for example, a big hit variation time) are provided, and the specific period is , A first period (for example, a period during which the variable display of the first to fourth special maps is executed for the first to fourth times after the end of the jackpot gaming state) and the second period after the first period. A period (for example, a period during which the variable display of the first special diagram or the second special diagram for the fifth to 49th time is executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state), and a third period after the second period (for example, After the jackpot gaming state, the variable display of the 50th to 99th first special drawing or the second special drawing is executed), and the setting means includes the second time in the first time period. It is possible to set the first variable display time (for example, the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PC1-1”) at a rate higher than the period (for example, by executing the processing of steps 018AKS107 to 018AKS109, the time saving count is counted. When it is determined that the value is included in the range of “1” to “4” (when it is determined that it is the first period), the high values corresponding to the first period and the fourth period shown in FIG. 8-8. (A CPU 103, etc., which determines the fluctuation pattern of the big hit fluctuation by referring to the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table for base time and sets the special sign fluctuation time of the big hit fluctuation to the special sign fluctuation time specified in the decided fluctuation pattern) , A second variable display time longer than the first variable display time at a higher rate in the second period than the first period and the third period (for example, variation patterns “PC3-1”, “PC3-2”). , "PC4-1" to "PC4-4", "PC5-1" to "PC5-4" special figure variation time, etc.) can be set (for example, step 0). By executing the processing of 18AKS107 to 018AKS109, when it is determined that the hour count count value is included in the range of “5” to “49” (when it is determined to be the second period), FIG. The fluctuation pattern of the big hit fluctuation is determined with reference to the high base time big hit fluctuation pattern determination table corresponding to the second period shown in 9, and the special figure fluctuation time of the big hit fluctuation is designated in the decided fluctuation pattern. The CPU 103, etc., which sets the special figure variation time), is higher than the first period and the second period in the third period, and is longer than the first variable display time and shorter than the second variable display time. It is possible to set 3 variable display times (for example, special pattern variation times of variation patterns "PB3-1", "PB3-2", "PB4-1" to "PB4-3", etc.) (for example, in steps 018AKS107 to 018AKS109). By executing the process, when it is determined that the hour count count value is included in the range of “50” to “99” (when it is determined that it is the third period), the number shown in FIG. The fluctuation pattern of the big hit fluctuation is determined by referring to the high base time big hit fluctuation pattern determination table corresponding to the three periods, and the special fluctuation time of the big hit fluctuation is designated as the special fluctuation time specified in the determined fluctuation pattern. CPU 103, etc.), a normal state (for example, a normal state), a special state different from the advantageous state after the end of the advantageous state (for example, a probable variation state, a time saving state, a high base state), and the advantageous state, A game that can be controlled to at least one of a first advantageous state (for example, 16 round jackpot, probability variation jackpot) and a second advantageous state (eg, 6 round jackpot, normal jackpot), which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. The state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 including the CPU 103) and the special state rather than the case where the advantageous state is controlled while being controlled to the normal state (for example, a so-called first hit big hit) When controlled to the advantageous state while being controlled to the state (for example, in the case of so-called consecutive big hit), a longer period as an end production period (for example, ending production time) at the end of the advantageous state. End effect selecting means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, step S366 in FIG. 9-10, FIG. 9-11) and an end effect (for example, ending effect) in the end effect period. Viable End effect executing means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control, step S772 of FIG. 9-22, FIG. 9-23 to FIG. 9-26), and the game state control means capable of controlling to the special state is The end time effect execution means includes the state control means capable of controlling to a specific state, and the end time effect execution means has a plurality of kinds of end time effects (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E in the end effect time period of the first advantageous state). ) Of the end productions executed by the end production execution means from among a plurality of types of end productions that can be executed in the end production period of the first advantageous state. An end-time production reception unit (eg, production control CPU 120, stick controller 31A, push button 31B) that can accept selection from the player. It may be another operation unit for setting. Step S752A in FIG. 9-19, step S784 in FIG. 9-20, and step S784 in FIG. 9-21. ) Is further provided with a gaming machine.

According to such a configuration, in the first period, a refreshing feeling is generated to improve the enjoyment of the game, in the second period, excessive gambling is suppressed, and in the third period, the advantageous state to the next advantageous state. It is possible to prevent the extension of the period up to, and to suppress the deterioration of the enjoyment of the game. Further, since the period of time controlled in the advantageous state can be lengthened, it is possible to reduce the gaming value given to the player per unit period of the advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. In addition, the player can select an end effect that is executed when the advantageous state ends. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the decrease in the interest of the game due to the extension due to the longer period at the end of the advantageous state.

That is, in both the specific state (special state) after the end of the advantageous state and the first advantageous state as the advantageous state, excessive gambling can be suppressed, and the period from the advantageous state to the next advantageous state or the advantageous state There is an excellent effect that it is possible to reduce the deterioration of the interest of the game due to the extension due to the longer period at the end of.

Further, as the gaming machine of the present invention, in addition, a gaming machine that can execute variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state) (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) In addition, after the end of the advantageous state, at least until a specific period (for example, after the jackpot gaming state ends, a variable display of the first special map or the second special map is executed a specific number of times (for example, 150 times)) In the jackpot end process executed in step S117 of the special symbol process process that can be controlled to a specific state (for example, a high base state) over a period of time), control to a high base state, and time saving control or The CPU 103 for starting the high opening control) and a setting means (for example, the CPU 103 for executing the processing of steps 018AKS108 and 018AKS109) capable of setting a variable display time (for example, a big hit variation time) are provided, and the specific period is , A first period (for example, a period during which the variable display of the first to fourth special maps is executed for the first to fourth times after the end of the jackpot gaming state) and the second period after the first period. A period (for example, a period during which the variable display of the first special diagram or the second special diagram for the fifth to 49th time is executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state), and a third period after the second period (for example, After the jackpot gaming state, the variable display of the 50th to 99th first special drawing or the second special drawing is executed), and the setting means includes the second time in the first time period. It is possible to set the first variable display time (for example, the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PC1-1”) at a rate higher than the period (for example, by executing the processing of steps 018AKS107 to 018AKS109, the time saving count is counted. When it is determined that the value is included in the range of “1” to “4” (when it is determined that it is the first period), the high values corresponding to the first period and the fourth period shown in FIG. 8-8. (A CPU 103, etc., which determines the fluctuation pattern of the big hit fluctuation by referring to the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table for base time and sets the special sign fluctuation time of the big hit fluctuation to the special sign fluctuation time specified in the decided fluctuation pattern) , A second variable display time longer than the first variable display time at a higher rate in the second period than the first period and the third period (for example, variation patterns “PC3-1”, “PC3-2”). , "PC4-1" to "PC4-4", "PC5-1" to "PC5-4" special figure variation time, etc.) can be set (for example, step 0). By executing the processing of 18AKS107 to 018AKS109, when it is determined that the hour count count value is included in the range of “5” to “49” (when it is determined to be the second period), FIG. The fluctuation pattern of the big hit fluctuation is determined with reference to the high base time big hit fluctuation pattern determination table corresponding to the second period shown in 9, and the special figure fluctuation time of the big hit fluctuation is designated in the decided fluctuation pattern. The CPU 103, etc., which sets the special figure variation time), is higher than the first period and the second period in the third period, and is longer than the first variable display time and shorter than the second variable display time. It is possible to set 3 variable display times (for example, variation patterns “PB3-1”, “PB3-2”, and special figure variation times of “PB4-1” to “PB4-3”) (for example, in steps 018AKS107 to 018AKS109). By executing the process, when it is determined that the hour count count value is included in the range of “50” to “99” (when it is determined that it is the third period), the number shown in FIG. The fluctuation pattern of the big hit fluctuation is determined by referring to the high base time big hit fluctuation pattern determination table corresponding to the three periods, and the special fluctuation time of the big hit fluctuation is designated as the special fluctuation time specified in the determined fluctuation pattern. CPU 103 or the like), further first special identification information (for example, first special symbol) as special identification information (for example, special symbol) and second special identification information that is more advantageous to the player than the first special identification information ( For example, a variable display of the second special symbol) can be executed, and the first reserved storage means (for example, the first reserved storage information) that can store the information regarding the variable display of the first special identification information as the first reserved memory information (for example, the first reserved memory) A game control microcomputer 100, a RAM 102) and a second hold storage means (for example, a game control microcomputer) capable of storing information regarding variable display of the second special identification information as second hold storage information (for example, second hold storage). A computer 100, a RAM 102) and a variable display of the second special identification information based on the second reserved storage information when both the first reserved storage information and the second reserved storage information are stored. Variable display control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 including the CPU 103, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, FIG. 9-) that is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special identification information. 4) and, as the advantageous state, A game state that can be controlled to at least one of a 1-favorable state (for example, 16-round jackpot, probability-variable jackpot) and a second advantageous state (for example, 6-round jackpot, normal jackpot) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. The control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100) and the advantage as a result of the variable display of the second reserved storage information are more advantageous than the case of being controlled to the advantageous state as a result of the variable display of the first reserved storage information. In the case of being controlled to the state, the end time effect selecting means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, which selects a long period at a high rate as the end time effect period (for example, ending effect time) when the advantageous state ends. 9-10) and finish production effect execution means (for example, CPU 120 for production control, FIG. 9-22 in FIG. 9-22) that can execute finish production (for example, ending production) during the finish production period. Step S772, FIG. 9-23 to FIG. 9-26), the variable display control means includes the setting means, and the end time effect executing means is in the end time effect period of the first advantageous state. , One of a plurality of types of end effects (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E) can be executed, and a plurality of types of end effects that can be executed in the end effect period of the first advantageous state. An end time effect reception means (for example, a CPU 120 for effect control, a stick controller 31A, and a push button 31B) that can accept the selection of the end time effect executed by the end time effect execution means from the player. It may be another operation unit for setting. Step S752A in FIG. 9-19, step S784 in FIG. 9-20, and step S784 in FIG. 9-21. ) Is further provided with a gaming machine.

According to such a configuration, in the first period, a refreshing feeling is generated to improve the enjoyment of the game, in the second period, excessive gambling is suppressed, and in the third period, the advantageous state to the next advantageous state. It is possible to prevent the extension of the period up to, and to suppress the deterioration of the enjoyment of the game. Further, since the period of time controlled in the advantageous state can be lengthened, it is possible to reduce the gaming value given to the player per unit period of the advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. In addition, the player can select an end effect that is executed when the advantageous state ends. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the decrease in the interest of the game due to the extension due to the longer period at the end of the advantageous state.

That is, in both the specific state (special state) after the end of the advantageous state and the first advantageous state as the advantageous state, excessive gambling can be suppressed, and the period from the advantageous state to the next advantageous state or the advantageous state There is an excellent effect that it is possible to reduce the deterioration of the interest of the game due to the extension due to the longer period at the end of.

Furthermore, as an example of the form of a gaming machine that can improve the entertainment of the game, suppress excessive gambling, and reduce the deterioration of the entertainment of the game, control to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state) A possible gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1), wherein as the advantageous state, a first advantageous state (for example, 16 round big hit, probability variation big hit) and a first disadvantageous state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. A game state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling at least one of two advantageous states (for example, 6 round big hit, normal big hit), and the first advantageous state is the second. End effect selecting means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, FIG. 9-) that selects a long period as an end effect period (for example, ending effect time) at the end of the advantageous state at a higher rate than in the advantageous state. 10 step S366, FIG. 9-11) and end effect production execution means (eg, effect control CPU 120, step of FIG. 9-22) capable of executing end effect (eg, ending effect) during the end effect period. S772, FIG. 9-23 to FIG. 9-26), the end time effect execution means, during the end time effect period of the first advantageous state, a plurality of types of end time effects (for example, effect pattern A to. One of the effect patterns E) can be executed, and an end effect executed by the end effect effect executing means from among a plurality of kinds of end effect effects that can be executed in the end effect period of the first advantageous state. The end effect reception means (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control, the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B, and other operation units for setting, which can accept the selection of the time effect from the player may be used. 975 and step S784 of FIG. 9-21. The period in which the selection can be accepted may be the first half of the end effect period or the second half of the big hit round. Specifically, in the 16R jackpot, the gaming machine may further include a period from the reception of the 13R start command to the reception of the 16R end command.).

Alternatively, it can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state), and is controlled to a special state (for example, a probability variation state, a time saving state, a high base state) different from the advantageous state after the advantageous state ends A possible gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) in a normal state (for example, a normal state), the special state, and the advantageous state as a first advantageous state (for example, 16 rounds big hit, probability variation big hit) And a second advantageous state (eg, 6 round big hit, normal big hit), which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state, a game state control means (eg, game control microcomputer 100). ), and controlling to the advantageous state when controlled to the special state, as compared to the case where the advantageous state is controlled to the normal state (for example, a so-called first big hit). In such a case (for example, in the case of a so-called consecutive big hit), an end time effect selecting unit that selects a long time period as an end time effect period (for example, ending effect time) at the end of the advantageous state at a high rate. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100, step S366 in FIG. 9-10, and FIG. 9-11), and an end time effect executing means capable of executing an end time effect (for example, ending effect) during the end time effect period ( For example, the CPU 120 for effect control, step S772 of FIG. 9-22, and FIG. 9-23 to FIG. 9-26) are provided, and the end time effect executing means, during the end time effect period of the first advantageous state, One of a plurality of types of end productions (for example, production pattern A to production pattern E) can be executed, and a plurality of types of end productions that can be executed in the end production period of the first advantageous state. An end time effect reception means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control, stick controller 31A, push button 31B, other for setting, which can accept the selection of the end time effect executed by the end time effect execution means from the player. 9-19. Step S752A in FIG. 9-19, FIG. 9-20, and step S784 in FIG. 9-21.

Alternatively, the first special identification information (for example, the first special symbol) as the special identification information (for example, the special symbol) and the second special identification information (for example, the second special symbol) that is more advantageous to the player than the first special identification information. It is possible to execute variable display of symbols), and it is possible to control in an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, big hit game state), and after the advantageous state ends, a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, probability variation state, A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in a time saving state and a high base state, wherein information relating to a variable display of the first special identification information is first reserved storage information (for example, first reserved storage). The first hold storage means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, the RAM 102) that can be stored as, and the information regarding the variable display of the second special identification information are stored as the second hold storage information (for example, the second hold storage). When the second hold storage means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, the RAM 102) capable of storing the first hold storage information and the second hold storage information are stored together, the second hold storage information. Variable display control means for executing the variable display of the second special identification information based on the variable display priority of the variable display of the first special identification information (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, the first special symbol display device 4A). , The second special symbol display device 4B, see FIG. 9-4), as the advantageous state, the first advantageous state (for example, 16 round big hit, probability variation big hit), and more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. A game state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling at least one of a second advantageous state (for example, a 6-round big hit, a normal big hit), and a result of the variable display of the first reserved storage information. As compared with the case of being controlled to the advantageous state, the case of being controlled to the advantageous state as a result of the variable display of the second held storage information is the end production period at the end of the advantageous state (for example, Ending effect selecting means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, step S366 in FIG. 9-10, FIG. 9-11) that selects a long period at a high rate as the ending effecting time, and ends in the ending effect period. An end time effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120, step S772 of FIG. 9-22, and FIG. 9-23 to FIG. 9-26) capable of executing an hour effect (for example, ending effect) is provided. Director The stage can execute any one of a plurality of types of finish productions (for example, production pattern A to production pattern E) during the finish production period of the first advantageous state, and the stage of the first advantageous state An end-time production reception unit (e.g., a production process) that can receive from the player a selection of an end-time production executed by the end-time production execution unit from a plurality of types of end-time productions that can be executed in the end-stage production period. Control CPU 120, stick controller 31A, push button 31B. It may be another operation unit for setting. Step S752A in FIG. 9-19, step S784 in FIG. 9-20, and step S784 in FIG. 9-21. ) Is further provided with a gaming machine. Below, an example of a form example of these gaming machines will be described as another form example.

Hereinafter, the characteristic portion of another embodiment will be described.
(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 069F of the present embodiment)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, problems may occur from the following viewpoints. Conventionally, there has been a gaming machine in which a big hit with a long ending period in which an end effect of a big hit is executed and a short big hit (see, for example, JP-A-2007-7165). In the gaming machine disclosed in JP-A-2007-7165, a short ending time is selected when the probability variation big hit occurs. However, when advantageous big hits occur consecutively, the ending period is shortened, the interval between big hits and the next big hits is shortened, and the speed at which prize balls can be obtained increases Could be too high. The gaming machines according to the inventions 069F to 071F that solve such problems are proposed below.

Further, conventionally, there has been a gaming machine in which an advantageous big hit is set to have a longer fanfare period at the start of the big hit than a disadvantageous big hit (for example, see JP-A-2014-148). However, simply setting the advantageous big hit fanfare period long may lead to a decline in interest. The gaming machines according to the inventions 073F and 074F that solve such problems are proposed below. In the following, the features of the gaming machines according to the inventions 069F to 071F, the invention 073F, and the invention 074F will be represented as a characteristic portion 069F. The characteristic part 069F can be applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above.

FIG. 9-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, showing a layout of main members. Hereinafter, description of the configuration common to that of FIG. 1 will not be repeated.

The game area 2 formed on the board surface of the game board has a left game area 2A on the left side of the top side of the image display device 5 and a right game area 2B on the right side. If the left game area 2A that is the first game area and the right game area 2B that is the second game area are divided by the end surface of the image display device 5 inside the game area 2 or the arrangement PL of the nails, for example. Good. When the game ball that is shot from the hitting ball launching device and is driven into the game area 2 is guided to the left game area 2A that is the first game area, for example, by being guided along the nail arrangement PL, , It becomes impossible or difficult to guide to the right game area 2B which is the second game area.

In the left game area 2A, a normal winning ball device 6A is provided. For example, the normal winning ball device 6A is provided below the center of the image display device 5. The normal winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening which is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. As described above, the left game area 2A is always provided with the normal winning ball device 6A that forms the first starting winning hole into which the game ball can enter.

In the right game area 2B, a normal variable winning ball device 6B is provided. The normal variable winning ball device 6B is an electric motor having a pair of movable blades that is changed to a closed state that is a vertical position and an open state that is a tilted position by a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. 9-2. A tulip-shaped accessory is provided to form the second starting winning opening. As an example, in the normal variable winning prize ball device 6B, when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the off state, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position, so that the game ball does not pass through the second starting winning hole. Put in a state. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the ON state, so that the game ball can pass through the second starting winning hole. Open it. The normal variable winning ball device 6B is normally opened when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, and the game ball can enter the second starting winning port, while the solenoid 81 is in the enlarged open state when the solenoid is in the on state. May be configured such that the game ball is difficult to enter. Thus, in the right game area 2B, the normal variable that can be changed to the first variable state in which the game ball can pass through the second start winning hole and the second variable state in which the game ball cannot pass or is difficult to pass. A winning ball device 6B is provided.

By the arrangement of the normal winning ball device 6A, the normal variable winning ball device 6B and the like in the left game area 2A and the right game area 2B, the game ball guided to the left game area 2A which is the first game area is the second game area. It is impossible or difficult to pass through the second start winning hole formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B provided in the right game area 2B. In addition, the game ball guided to the right game area 2B, which is the second game area, has the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A provided in the left game area 2A, which is the first game area. Impossible or difficult to pass.

The game ball that has entered the first starting winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by, for example, the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. 9-2. The game ball that has entered the second starting winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by, for example, the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. 9-2. Based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as a prize ball, and if the first reserved memory number is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit value, the first start The condition is met. Based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as a prize ball, and if the second reserved memory number is equal to or less than the predetermined upper limit value, the second start is performed. The condition is met. The number of prize balls paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first starting opening switch 22A and the number of prize balls paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second starting opening switch 22B. May be the same or different in number.

Two special variable winning ball devices are provided below the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The upper special variable winning ball device 7A includes a upper special winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82A for the upper special winning opening door shown in FIG. 9-2. The upper special winning opening door opens and closes. Forming a top prize hole that changes to. As an example, in the upper special variable winning ball device 7A, the upper special winning opening door closes the upper special winning opening when the solenoid 82A for the upper special winning opening door is off. On the other hand, in the upper special variable winning ball device 7A, the upper special winning opening door opens the upper special winning opening when the solenoid 82A for the upper special winning opening door is on. The game ball that has entered the upper special winning opening formed on the upper special variable winning ball device 7A is detected by, for example, the upper special winning opening switch 23A shown in FIG. 9-2. In addition, in this embodiment, the upper special winning opening and the lower special winning opening have the same door shape, but the shapes of the two special winning openings may be different. For example, one of them may be an electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces that change between a closed state and an open state like the normal variable winning ball device 6B, or a state stored in the game area 2. It may be a winning opening that changes to a state of protruding from.

The lower special variable winning ball device 7B is provided with a lower special winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82B for the lower special winning opening door shown in FIG. 9-2. Form a lower prize hole that changes to. As an example, in the lower special variable winning a prize ball device 7B, the lower special winning opening door closes the lower special winning opening when the solenoid 82B for the lower special winning opening door is off. On the other hand, in the lower special variable winning a prize ball device 7B, when the solenoid 82B for the lower special winning opening door is on, the lower special winning opening door opens the lower special winning opening. The game ball that has entered the lower special winning opening formed on the lower special variable winning a prize ball device 7B is detected by, for example, the lower special winning opening switch 23B shown in FIG. 9-2.

A large number of game balls are paid out as prize balls when the game balls pass through the upper special winning opening formed by the upper special variable winning ball device 7A and the lower large winning opening formed by the lower special variable winning ball device 7B. That is, the upper special variable winning ball device 7A is in the first state advantageous to the player by opening the upper special winning opening by the upper special winning opening door. The lower special variable winning ball device 7B is in the first state, which is advantageous to the player, by opening the lower special winning opening through the lower special winning opening door. On the other hand, the upper special variable winning ball device 7A is in the second state, which is disadvantageous to the player, by closing the upper special winning opening with the upper special winning opening door. The lower special variable winning ball device 7B is in the second state, which is disadvantageous to the player, by closing the lower special winning opening with the lower special winning opening door. In addition, instead of the closed state where the game ball cannot pass through the upper and lower prize holes, or in addition to the closed state, the game ball does not easily pass through the upper and lower prize holes. State may be provided.

Inside the upper special variable winning ball device 7A, a discharge path is provided through which the game balls that have entered the upper special winning opening that has been opened by the upper special winning opening door are discharged from the upper special variable winning ball device 7A. There is. The game ball discharged from the upper special variable winning ball device 7A is detected by the first discharge switch 24C installed in the discharge path.

Inside the lower special variable winning ball device 7B, the game ball that has entered the lower special winning opening that has been opened by the lower special winning opening door passes through a predetermined probability variation area, or does not pass through it. A guide route for guiding the player to the discharge route discharged from the special variable winning ball device 7B is provided. The game ball that has entered the lower special variable winning ball device 7B first passes through the route provided with the lower special winning opening switch 23B for detecting the winning game ball, and then the guide path to the probability variation area and the probability variation. It is guided to a branch point to a guideway that does not pass through the area and guides to the discharge path. When the game ball guided to the branch point flows down the guide path to the probability variation area, this game ball is detected by the probability variation area switch 24A, and the probability variation control condition for becoming the probability variation state after the jackpot gaming state ends To establish. That is, the place where the probability variation area switch 24A is installed is defined as the probability variation area, and based on the fact that the game ball has passed through this probability variation area, a predetermined probability variation control condition can be established. Since the probability variation area is inside the lower special variable winning ball device 7B, only the game balls that have won the lower special variable winning ball device 7B can pass through.

The probability variation area changes to an open state in which the game ball can pass and a closed state in which it cannot pass by the probability variation area lid driven by the solenoid 82C for the probability variation area lid. As an example, when the probability variation region lid solenoid 82C is in the off state, the probability variation region cover moves to a position where it closes the probability variation region and closes the probability variation region. On the other hand, when the probability variation region cover solenoid 82C is in the ON state, the probability variation region cover moves to a position where the probability variation region lid is not blocked, and the probability variation region is opened. The game ball that has reached the branch point when the probability variation area is in the closed state does not pass through the probability variation area and is discharged from the lower special variable winning ball device 7B as it is. In this case, the game ball is detected by the second discharge switch 24B installed on the common discharge path. On the other hand, the game ball that has reached the branch point when the probability variation area is in the open state passes through the probability variation area and is detected by the probability variation area switch 24A installed in the probability variation area. Then, the game ball that has passed through the probability variation area is discharged from the lower special variable winning ball device 7B. When the gaming ball that has won the lower special variable winning ball device 7B passes through the probability variation area, the probability variation area switch 24A detects the game ball that has passed through the probability variation area, and is controlled to the probability variation state. Therefore, by adjusting the ratio of the game ball winning the lower special variable winning ball device 7B and the length of time and timing of the probability variation area cover in the permissible position, the ratio of controlling to the probability variation state is set appropriately. be able to.

In the present embodiment, the inside of the lower special variable winning ball device 7B is configured such that at least the periphery of the probability variation region is visible to the player. Therefore, it is possible for the player to confirm whether or not the game ball that has entered the lower special variable winning ball device 7B has passed through the probability variation area.

Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be schematically described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the game ball passes through the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A in the left game area 2A, the gaming ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. 9-2. The first starting condition is satisfied because of the above. After that, for example, based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied because the previous special figure game or the jackpot gaming state has ended, the special figure game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. Is started.

When the game ball passes through the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B in the right game area 2B, that gaming ball is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. 9-2. As a result, the second starting condition is satisfied. After that, for example, based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied because the previous special figure game or the jackpot gaming state has ended, the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Is started. However, when the normal variable winning ball device 6B is in the normally open state or the closed state as the second variable state, it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to pass through the second starting winning port.

In the present embodiment, in the normal game state different from the probability variation state, the normal variable winning a prize ball device 6B is in the second variable state, so that it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to pass through the second starting winning hole. .. Therefore, the special figure game using the second special figure is not started. Therefore, in the normal game state which is not yet controlled in the probability changing state, the player guides the game ball to the left game area 2A and uses the special special game based on the first special prize based on the winning at the first starting winning opening. And the "big hit" of the special figure game. In the big hit game state based on the result of the variable display result of the special hit game using the first special drawing, the game ball enters the lower special variable winning ball device 7B in a specific round. Furthermore, it becomes possible to pass through the probability variation region. When the game ball passes through the probability variation area, the probability variation confirmation flag is set, and the transition to the special game state controlled to the probability variation state is determined. After that, when the big hit game state ends, it is controlled to the probability change state, the normal variable winning a prize ball device 6B changes to the first variable state, and the game ball can pass through the second starting winning hole. In this embodiment, the second special figure game is more advantageous than the first special figure game. Therefore, the player guides the game ball to the right game area 2A, starts the special figure game using the second special figure based on the winning at the second starting winning opening, and the "big hit game" of the special figure game. Will be aimed at. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with various game experiences that change according to the game state.

In the big hit game state, the upper special winning opening or the lower special winning opening is opened, and the upper special variable winning ball device 7A or the lower special variable winning ball device 7B becomes the first state advantageous to the player. Then, during the predetermined period, or until a predetermined number of game balls enter the upper prize hole or the lower prize hole to generate the prize ball, the upper prize hole or the lower prize hole is continued. A round game to be opened is executed. During periods other than the execution period of the round game, the upper special winning opening and the lower special winning opening are closed, and it is difficult or impossible to generate winning balls. When a game ball enters the upper prize hole, the upper prize switch 23A detects the prize ball, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as a prize ball each time the game ball is detected. When a game ball enters the lower special winning opening, the lower special winning opening switch 23B detects the winning ball, and similarly a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out. The round game in the big hit game state is repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number of times is reached. Therefore, in the big hit game state, the player can very easily obtain a large number of prize balls, and the game state is advantageous for the player. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may directly pay out the game balls to be prize balls, or may give a score corresponding to the number of game balls to become prize balls.

After the jackpot gaming state is over, the probability that the variable display result is "big hit" may be controlled to be higher than the normal state based on the establishment of a predetermined probability variation control condition. In the present embodiment, the probability variation control condition is that the probability variation area switch 24A detects passage of the game sphere that has entered the lower special variable prize winning ball device 7B from the lower special winning opening to the probability variation area. This probability variation state is controlled to continue until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times. That is, the end of the variable display for the predetermined number of times is the certainty change end condition.

In the probability changing state, the normal variable winning ball device 6B in the second variable state in the normal state, the first variable state in which the game ball can pass through the second starting winning port, and the second variable state in which it is impossible. Change. In this way, the control for changing the normally variable winning ball device 6B between the first variable state and the second variable state is referred to as the electric Chu opening control. In the present embodiment, the second special figure game started when the game ball has passed through the second starting winning opening is started when passing through the first starting winning opening that can be passed even in the normal state. This is more advantageous to the player than the first special figure game. Therefore, the probability change state in which the electric Chu opening control is executed is a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

It should be noted that when the probability variation control is performed in the probability variation state, the electric tube opening control may not be performed. For example, when the variable display result is "big hit", the upper limit winning opening and the lower winning opening are in the open state in the big hit game state, the upper limit time is short, and the game ball is difficult to pass or cannot pass. A game is executed, and after the big hit game state ends, it may be controlled to a probability change state. In such a case, the jackpot type is also referred to as "probable". Then, when the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability" when the electric Chu opening control is not being performed, the probability change control is performed after the big hit game state ends, but the positive change state is performed. It is also possible not to perform the electric charge opening control.

The game ball used as a game medium in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the record information of the points given in correspondence with the number thereof have, for example, a valuable value that can be exchanged for a special prize or a general prize according to the number. I wish I had it. Alternatively, the recorded information of the game balls and the points may not be exchanged for special prizes or general prizes, but may have valuable value that can be used for another game in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Further, the game value that can be given in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to the payout of a game ball that is a prize ball and the addition of a score, and for example, control in a jackpot game state or a special game state such as a probability variation state Control, the jackpot gaming state, which is more advantageous in the case of a jackpot, is selected to be the first proportion higher than the second proportion, and the maximum number of rounds that can be executed in the jackpot gaming state is the second It may include that the game situation is advantageous for the player, such as the first round number being larger than the round number, the jackpot probability in the probability variation state being the first probability higher than the second probability. ..

In this embodiment, a round game of the number of rounds according to the type of jackpot is executed. Of these, when the number of times of executing the round game becomes “3” as the specific number, the round game with the lower special winning opening opened is executed, and the lower special variable winning ball device 7B is advantageous for the player. It will be in the first state. On the other hand, when the number of times of executing the round game is other than “3” as the specific number of times, the round game with the upper special winning opening in the open state is executed, and the upper special variable winning ball device 7A is advantageous to the player. It becomes a state. In the round game executed for the third time, since the lower special variable winning ball device 7B is in the first state and the game ball that has entered the lower special variable winning ball device 7B can pass through the probability variation area, these round games are It is also called a certain variation open round game. On the other hand, the round game in which the special variable winning ball device 7A other than the third time is in the first state is also referred to as a normally open round game. In addition, the period when one round game is executed is one round, and the big hit game state executed based on one "big hit" includes a plurality of rounds. Of these, the round in which the lower special variable winning ball device 7B executed in the third time is opened is expressed as the lower opening round. The other rounds in which the upper special variable winning device 7A is in the open state are expressed as upper open rounds. That is, when the variable display result is "big hit", in the big hit game state controlled based on the "big hit", the round game provided with the operation time of the lower big winning opening door and the upper big winning A plurality of round games including a round game in which the operating time of the door is provided are executed.

In the present embodiment, when the variable display result is "big hit", as the big hit type, in the big hit game state controlled based on the "big hit", the number of times of executing the round game is "3" as the specific number of times. , There are a plurality of types of jackpots having different upper limit times for opening the lower special winning opening. As an example, when the jackpot type is the "first jackpot", it is controlled to the "first jackpot gaming state" in which the upper limit time for opening the lower jackpot is 52 milliseconds. When the jackpot type is "second jackpot" or "third jackpot", the jackpot gaming state is set such that the upper limit time for opening the lower jackpot is longer than the first jackpot. In the first big hit game state, the control time of the open state is as short as 52 milliseconds, so that the rate at which the game ball can actually enter the lower special winning opening and enter the lower special variable winning ball device 7B is low. Therefore, when the big hit type is the "first big hit", it is unlikely that the game ball will pass through the lower big winning opening, and it is difficult to establish the probability variation control condition for entering the probability variation state after the big hit game state is over. On the other hand, in the second big hit or third big hit game state, since it is opened for about 29 seconds, if the game ball is guided to the right game area 2B in which the lower special variable winning ball device 7B is installed, the game ball has a high rate. Can enter the lower special variable winning ball device 7B. Therefore, after the end of the big hit game state, the probability variation control condition for becoming the probability variation state is easily established.

Which of the plurality of types of jackpots is selected is determined at a predetermined ratio, for example, in response to the determination that the variable display result is “big hit” at the start of the special drawing game. When a game ball enters the lower special variable winning ball device 7B, not only is a predetermined number of game balls paid out, but also the game ball passes through the probability changing area depending on the position of the probability changing area lid, and the variable display result becomes "big hit". Probability is controlled to be a probable state that is higher than the non-probable state. Therefore, the second big hit and third big hit game states are more advantageous to the player than the first big hit game state. Further, the third jackpot gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the second jackpot gaming state in that the prize balls are often paid out in the upper opening round. The second jackpot is more advantageous to the player than the first jackpot in terms of payout of prize balls and establishment of the probability variation control condition.

In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display. Various processes are selected in order to control the display operation in the device 4B and to set the opening/closing operation of the special winning opening in the upper special variable winning ball device 7A and the lower special variable winning ball device 7B in a predetermined procedure. To be executed.

Subsequent to the special symbol process processing, the CPU 103 executes the probability variation area solenoid control processing for controlling the position of the probability variation area lid and the validity/invalidity of the probability variation area. In the probability variation area solenoid control process, the CPU 103 controls the opening/closing of the probability variation area lid based on the value of the probability variation area solenoid control code set in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 in the big hit game state being set to "1". Then, the switching control for enabling/disabling the probability variation region is executed. For example, opening and closing of the probability variation region lid and switching between valid and invalid of the probability variation region are executed based on the probability variation solenoid pattern table. The probability variation solenoid pattern table may be a table in which the timing of switching the open/closed state of the probability variation region lid and the timing of switching the validity/invalidity of the probability variation region are stored in association with the elapsed time from the start of the round in the round game. Alternatively, in connection with the opening and closing of the lower special winning opening, if the lower special winning opening is in the open state, the probability variation area may be in the open state and the probability variation area may be valid. On the other hand, when the lower special winning opening is closed, the probability variation area may be closed and the probability variation area may be invalidated. In the probability variation area solenoid control process, a usage pattern is selected from a plurality of probability variation solenoid pattern tables stored in the ROM 101 in accordance with the big hit type and the number of rounds of the round game to be executed. Then, based on the selected usage pattern, the probability variation area detection valid flag set in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 is updated. Further, by updating the probability variation area solenoid buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 in accordance with the value of the read solenoid output designation data, the solenoid 82C for the probability variation area lid is turned on/off according to the solenoid output designation data. To control. That is, the position of the probability variation region lid is controlled. The probability variation region solenoid buffer is an output buffer for outputting a control signal for designating ON/OFF to the probability variation region lid solenoid 82C, and the probability variation region command in the command control process according to the value stored in the buffer. A control signal is output to the area cover solenoid 82C.

9-3 is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed in step S25 of FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101 shown in FIG. 9C, the CPU 103 performs any of the processes of steps S110 to S117 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. Select or execute. Of the description of these processes, the same description as that described with reference to FIG. 7 will not be repeated.

The big hit opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". In this big hit opening pre-processing, based on the fact that the variable display result is "big hit", etc., in the big hit game state, the execution of the round game according to the big hit type is started and the upper big prize hole or the lower big prize hole is opened. It includes a process for setting the open state and the like. In the present embodiment, this jackpot opening preprocessing determines whether or not the round game to be started is a probability variation opening round in which the lower special winning opening is opened, and if it is a probability variation opening round, Further, a process of setting the probability variation region solenoid control code to 1 is further included as common control data for supporting the start of the position control of the probability variation region lid and the start of the valid/invalid control of the probability variation region. Further, it further includes a process of updating the solenoid output data table according to the big winning opening to be opened. When the jackpot opening preprocessing is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5".

The big hit opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This big hit opening process is a process of measuring the elapsed time after the upper special winning opening or the lower special winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the upper special winning opening switch 23A or the lower large winning opening switch 23B. Based on the number of gaming balls or the like detected by, the processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the upper special winning opening or the lower special winning opening from the open state to the closed state is included. In this big hit opening process, the lower special winning opening detection process is further executed in the probability variation opening round. In addition, the lower special winning opening detection process is based on the number of gaming balls that have won the lower special variable winning ball device 7B and the number of gaming balls discharged from the lower special variable winning ball device 7B. The process of counting the game balls in the device 7B, the process of determining whether or not the passage of the game balls to the probability variation region is detected, the probability variation confirmation flag is set when the passage of the probability variation region is detected when the probability variation region is valid. Including processing to set. When the upper special winning opening or the lower special winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6". In this embodiment, when the round game is finished, whether the upper special winning opening or the lower large winning opening is closed, the process of closing the upper special winning opening and the lower large winning opening The process of closing the winning opening is executed together. Therefore, the process of determining whether the target of the closing process is the upper special winning opening or the lower special winning opening is unnecessary. Further, it is easy to change the design because it is only necessary to delete or add the process of making the closed state regardless of whether the number of special winning openings to be used is increased or decreased.

The post-big hit opening process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of the round game in which the upper special winning opening or the lower special winning opening is opened has reached a predetermined upper limit number, or the upper limit number has not been reached. In this case, a process of waiting until the next round game is started is included. In the present embodiment, as the jackpot opening post-processing, the above-described lower special winning opening detection processing is further executed in the probability variation opening round. In addition, after the big hit opening processing, based on the number of gaming balls in the lower special variable winning ball device 7B counted by the big winning opening detection processing, processing for allowing execution of control after the running round is further performed. included. Then, when the next round game is started, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the number of executions of the round game reaches the upper limit number, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "7".

The big hit ending process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". In this big hit ending process, a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state is executed by the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 and the like. It includes a process of waiting until the time elapses, a process of performing various settings for controlling to the probable variation state and the time saving state in response to the success or failure of the probabilistic variation control condition, and the like. Then, when the setting for controlling the probability variation state or the time saving state is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

FIG. 9-4 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S110 of FIG. 9-3 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 9-4, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol reservation storage number is "0" (step S231). The second special figure reservation storage number is the reservation storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step S231, the second reserved storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 may be read and it may be determined whether or not the read value is "0".

When the number of the second special figure reservation storage is other than "0" in step S231 (step S231; NO), the reservation stored corresponding to the reservation number "1" in the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B. Numerical data indicating a random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and a random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are read out as data (step S232). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a fluctuation random number buffer or the like and temporarily stored.

Subsequent to the process of step S232, the second special figure reserved storage number is updated by subtracting 1 from the second special storage number count value by updating the second special storage number by 1, and the second special figure is updated. The pending data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the pending number “1” in the pending storage unit 151B is shifted upward by one entry (step S233). Further, in the processing of step S233, the game control counter setting unit 154 may be updated so that the total reserved storage number count value stored in the total reserved storage number counter is decremented by 1. At this time, the variable special map designation buffer value, which is the value stored in the variable special map designation buffer, is updated to "2" (step S234).

When the second special figure reservation storage number is "0" in step S231 (step S231; YES), it is determined whether the first special figure reservation storage number is "0" (step S235). The first special figure reservation storage number is the reservation storage number of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step S235, the game control counter setting unit 154 reads the first reserved storage number count value stored in the first reserved storage number counter, and determines whether or not the read value is "0". do it. Thus, the process of step S235 is executed when it is determined in step S231 that the second special figure pending storage number is "0", and the first special figure pending storage number is "0". Or not. As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

When the number of the first special figure reservation storage is other than "0" in step S235 (step S235; NO), the reservation stored corresponding to the reservation number "1" in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A. As data, numerical data indicating a random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and a random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are read out (step S236). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a fluctuation random number buffer or the like and temporarily stored.

Subsequent to the process of step S236, for example, the first special storage number is updated by subtracting 1 from the first reserved memory count value, and the first special memory is updated to be decreased by 1, and the first special map is updated. The pending data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the pending number "1" in the pending storage unit is shifted to the upper by one entry (step S237). Further, in the process of step S237, the game control counter setting unit 154 may be updated so that the total reserved storage number count value stored in the total reserved storage number counter is decremented by 1. At this time, the variable special map designation buffer value is updated to "1" (step S238).

After performing either of the processing of steps S234 and S238, it is determined whether the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is “big hit” or “miss” (step S239). As an example, in the process of step S239, the special figure display result determination table prepared by being stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance is selected and set in the use table for determining the special figure display result. In the special figure display result determination table, a numerical value that is compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result indicates whether the special figure display result is a “big hit” according to whether the probability variation control is performed or not. ”And “miss” should be assigned to the determination result. The CPU 103 may determine the special figure display result by referring to the special figure display result determination table on the basis of the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result read out from the random number buffer for variation.

FIG. 9-5(A) shows an example of determination in the process of step S239. In this example of determination, the determination rate of whether or not the special figure display result is “big hit” is varied depending on the presence or absence of the probability variation control in the probability variation state. More specifically, when the probability variation control is performed in the probability variation state, the special figure display result is determined to be “big hit” at a higher rate than when the probability variation control is not performed in the normal state. Therefore, in the probability variation state in which the probability variation control is performed, the special figure display result is more likely to be "big hit" and in the jackpot gaming state than in the normal state in which the probability variation control is not performed. That is, the probability variation state in which the probability variation control is performed is more advantageous to the player than the normal state in which the probability variation control is not performed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result determined in step S239 is "big hit" (step S240). When the special figure display result is determined to be "big hit" (step S240; YES), for example, a big hit flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 such as the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to an on state (step). S241), the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S242). As an example, in the process of step S242, a jackpot type determination table prepared by storing it in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance is selected and set as a use table for determining the jackpot type. In the jackpot type determination table, a numerical value to be compared with the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination is assigned to the determination result as to which of the plurality of jackpot types according to the fluctuation special map designation buffer value or the like. Just do it. The CPU 103 may determine the jackpot type by referring to the jackpot type determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination read from the variation random number buffer.

FIG. 9-5(B) shows an example of determination in the process of step S242. In this example of determination, the special symbols that are variably displayed in the special figure game in which the start condition is satisfied are different in the determination ratio of the big hit type depending on whether the special symbol is the first special figure or the second special figure. ing. Here, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is "1", the start condition of the special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied, and the variation special figure becomes the first special figure. On the other hand, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "2", the special special game display device 4B start condition of the special figure game is satisfied, the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure. In the determination example shown in FIG. 9-5(B), when the variation special map is the first special map, the big hit type is determined to be either “first big hit” or “second big hit”. On the other hand, when the variation special map is the second special map, the big hit type is only determined to be the “third big hit”. That is, the jackpot type is determined to be the “first jackpot” and the “second jackpot” only when the variation special map is the first special map. In this way, different jackpot types may be determined according to the special symbols variably displayed in the special figure game. Further, the jackpot type is determined to be "third jackpot" only when the variation special map is the second special map.

In this embodiment, a round game of the number of rounds corresponding to the type of big hit is executed, and the lower special winning opening is opened in a predetermined probability variation open round in the big hit game state. In the normal opening round, the upper prize hole is opened. Here, when the big hit type is "the second big hit" and "the third big hit", in the predetermined probability variation open round in the big hit game state, the big hit type is lower than the first big hit. The upper limit time of the open state becomes long, and the probability variation control condition for becoming the probability variation state after the jackpot gaming state is easily established. By determining the jackpot type according to the determination rate as shown in FIG. 9-5 (B), when the variation special map is the second special map, the big hit game at a higher rate than when it is the first special map. The probability variation control condition for achieving the probability variation state after the state ends is satisfied. That is, when the special figure display result is "big hit" in the second special figure game, the probability variation control condition is more easily established than when the special figure display result is "big hit" in the first special figure game.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot type is the “first jackpot”, the upper limit time for opening the lower special winning opening is as short as 52 milliseconds, so that the percentage of game balls entering the lower special winning opening is very high. Low. Therefore, the probability that the probability variation control condition is satisfied is very low. On the other hand, in the case of the “second big hit” and the “third big hit”, since the upper limit time is 29 seconds, the probability that the game ball enters the lower special winning opening is high. Therefore, the probability that the probability variation control condition is satisfied is high. In the present embodiment, when the "big hit" occurs in the probability changing state, the big hit type is determined as "second big hit" or "third big hit", so the special game is controlled from the normal game state to the positive change state. It is possible to set such that while the rate of being in the state is lowered, the “big hit” continues at a high rate once the probability variation state is once controlled. As for the “second big hit”, the probability that the probability variation control condition is satisfied is higher than that of the “first big hit” like the “third big hit”, but since the number of rounds is smaller than that of the third big hit, the “big hit” is The number of balls to be paid out as prize balls based on "."

To explain the mechanism in detail, in the special drawing game using the first special drawing, when the variable display result is "big hit", it becomes the first big hit at a predetermined rate and based on the "big hit". The probability variation control condition is not satisfied in the big hit game state controlled by, and after the big hit game state ends, the game state shifts to the normal game state that is not controlled to the probability change state. On the other hand, in the special figure game using the first special figure, in the case of the "second big hit", the probability variation control condition is satisfied at a high rate in the big hit game state controlled based on the "big hit", and the big hit game is played. After the state is finished, it is controlled to a special game state which is controlled to the probability variation state. In the special game state, the normal variable winning a prize ball device 6B is controlled to the open state, and the special figure game using the second special figure can be started. In the special figure game using the second special figure, when the variable display result is "big hit", it is always "third big hit", so that the probability change state is controlled again with a high probability after the big hit ends. For this reason, until all the special figure games of a predetermined number of times in the probability variation state are "missed" and the probability variation ending condition is satisfied, the "big hit" and the probability variation state continue in succession. With such a configuration, while the percentage of the variable display result of the big hit type being "the second big hit" is reduced in the first special figure game which is performed in the normal gaming state, the variable display result of the "second big hit" is temporarily changed. After being derived, the probability that the probability change state and the “big hit” will continue to increase will provide a sharp and exciting gaming experience.

After executing the process of step S242, the big hit type is stored (step S243). In the process of step S243, for example, by storing the data showing the determination result of the big hit type in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 such as the big hit type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155, the big hit type can be stored. Good.

When it is determined in step S240 that it is not a “big hit” (step S240; NO), after executing the processing of step S243, a pre-determined result of whether or not to control the big hit gaming state, and further, a big hit Corresponding to the determination result of the jackpot type in the game state, the fixed special symbol is set (step S244). As an example, when it is determined in step S240 that the special figure display result is not “big hit”, the special symbol display result corresponds to the pre-determined result of “missing”, and the pattern becomes a losing symbol. The special symbol indicating the symbol "-" is set as the confirmed special symbol. On the other hand, if the special figure display result is determined to be a "big hit" in step S240, any of the special symbols that are predetermined as a plurality of kinds of big hit symbols, depending on the determination result of the big hit type in step S242. It may be set as a confirmed special symbol. In this embodiment, when the jackpot type is "first jackpot", the symbol "5" or "9" is used, and when it is "second jackpot", the symbol "3" is used. In the case of "3 big hits", the symbol "7" is set as the definite symbol with the special symbols respectively indicated.

After executing the process of step S244, after updating the value of the special figure process flag to "1" (step S245), the special symbol normal process is ended. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1" in step S245, so that the next timer interrupt occurs, the fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 shown in FIG. 9C is executed.

If the number of pending storage of the special figure game using the first special figure is "0" in step S235 (step S235; YES), after performing a predetermined demo display setting (step S246), the special symbol Normal processing ends. In this demonstration display setting, for example, has an effect control command for designating a demonstration display such as displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 already transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12? Determine whether or not. At this time, if it has been transmitted, the demo display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demo designation command is performed, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

FIG. 9-6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 9-3 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 9-6, the CPU 103 first determines, for example, whether or not the special symbol finalized display flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, such as the game control flag setting unit 152, is on. (Step S261). The special figure fixed display flag is set to the ON state in response to the fixed special symbol that is a variable display result in the special figure game being derivatized and displayed.

In step S261, when the special symbol finalization display flag is off (step S261; NO), setting for deriving and displaying the finalized special symbol is performed (step S262), and the command transmission setting at the time of symbol finalization is set. It is performed (step S263). For example, an effect control command prepared in advance as a symbol determination command is set to be transmitted to the effect control board 12. Further, a predetermined constant time is set as the special figure display time (step S264). Then, after the special symbol finalized display flag is set to the on state (step S265), the special symbol stop processing is ended. At this time, since the special figure process flag is not updated, the special symbol stop processing is executed again when the next timer interrupt occurs.

When the special figure finalization display flag is ON in step S261 (step S261; YES), it is determined whether the special figure finalization display time has elapsed (step S266). At this time, if the special symbol confirmation display time has not elapsed (step S266; NO), the special symbol stop process ends. Here, since the special figure process flag is not updated, the special symbol stop processing is executed again when the next timer interrupt occurs, and waits until the special figure fixed display time elapses.

When the special figure finalization display time has elapsed in step S266 (step S266; YES), the special figure finalization display flag is cleared and turned off (step S267), and then the big hit flag is turned on. It is determined (step S268). When the big hit flag is on (step S268; YES), the fanfare production time corresponding to the big hit type is set (step S269).

FIG. 9-7 is a diagram showing a fanfare time table. Referring to FIG. 9-7, as shown in FIGS. 9-7(A) and 9-7(B), respectively, a big hit occurs in the low base state and a big hit occurs in the high base state. The fanfare production time is set in advance in accordance with the type of jackpot against the continuous consecutive times.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-7, the transmission setting of the big hit start designation command capable of specifying the fanfare production time according to the big hit type is performed (step S270), and, for example, the RAM 102 such as the game control flag setting unit 152. The big hit start flag provided in the predetermined area is set to the on state (step S271). Then, the setting for ending the probability variation control is performed (step S272). For example, as the process of step S272, a process of clearing a probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 or the like to an off state, or a probability variation for counting the number of remaining special figure games in which the probability variation control is performed. It suffices to execute processing such as clearing the frequency counter.

The probability variation counter is provided, for example, in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 such as the game control counter setting unit 154, and corresponds to the upper limit number of special figure games in which probability variation control is performed when the probability variation state is reached after the jackpot gaming state ends. The initial count value may be set.

After executing the processing of step S272, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4" (step S273), and then the special symbol stop processing is ended. By updating the value of the special figure process flag to "4", when the next timer interrupt occurs, the big hit opening preprocessing of step S114 shown in FIG. 9C is executed.

When the big hit flag is off in step S268 (step S268; NO), the value of the special figure process flag is initialized to "0" (step S274). After executing the process of step S274, it is determined whether or not the probability variation control is to be ended (step S275). As an example, in the process of step S275, when the probability variation count value stored in the probability variation counter is other than “0”, the count value is updated by subtracting 1 from the updated value, and the updated probability variation count after updating. It is determined whether or not the count value matches a predetermined probability variation end determination value. At this time, if the probability variation end determination value matches, the probability variation control may be terminated by clearing a predetermined probability variation flag or the like. On the other hand, if it does not match the probability variation end determination value, the state of the probability variation flag is maintained, and the process of step S275 may be terminated.

After executing the process of step S275, after performing the setting for transmitting the game state designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step S276), the special symbol stop processing is ended. By updating the value of the special figure process flag to "0", when the next timer interrupt process occurs, the special symbol normal process of step S110 shown in FIG. 9C is executed.

FIG. 9-8 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S114 of FIG. 9-3 as the big hit opening pre-process. In the big hit opening preprocessing shown in FIG. 9-8, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit start flag is on (step S291). The big hit flag is set to the on state by the processing of step S271 shown in FIG. 9-6 in response to the start of the big hit game state.

When the big hit start flag is ON in step S291 (step S291; YES), it is determined whether or not the fanfare production time has elapsed (step S292). At this time, if the fanfare production time has not elapsed (step S292; NO), the big hit opening preprocessing is ended. Here, since the special figure process flag is not updated, the jackpot opening preprocessing is executed again when the next timer interrupt occurs, and the process waits until the fanfare production time elapses.

When the fanfare production time has elapsed in step S292 (step S292; YES), as a process for starting the first round game in the big hit game state, after clearing the big hit start flag and turning it off (step) S293), for example, a round counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 such as the control counter setting unit 154 is set to "1" as a count initial value corresponding to the number of round game executions (step S294).

When the jackpot start flag is OFF in step S291 (step S291; NO) and after the processing of step S294 is performed, for example, from the jackpot type buffer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, the jackpot type shown in FIG. The jackpot type buffer value indicating the jackpot type determined in step S245 is read, and, for example, from a round counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 such as a game control counter setting unit, a round indicating the number of rounds of the round game to be started from now on. The count value is read (step S295).

Then, the CPU 103, on the basis of the big hit type buffer value and the round count value read in step S295, forms a special winning opening to be opened in the round game to be started on the upper special variable winning ball device 7A. Either the special winning opening or the lower special winning opening formed in the lower special variable winning ball device 7B is determined (step S296). When the round count value is "3", it is determined to execute the round game in which the lower special winning opening is opened. On the other hand, when the round count value is other than "3", it is determined to execute the round game in which the upper special winning opening is opened. Therefore, when the number of times of executing the round game becomes “3” as the specific number, the round game with the lower special winning opening opened is executed, and the lower special variable winning ball device 7B is advantageous to the player. It becomes a state.

The CPU 103 may set a detection effective switch for effectively detecting a game ball in accordance with the determination of the special winning opening to be opened by the process of step S296. For example, when the round count value is “3”, the lower special winning opening switch 23B is activated in association with the lower special winning opening being opened. On the other hand, when the round count value is other than "3", the upper special winning opening is opened and the detection of the game ball by the upper special winning opening switch 23A is enabled.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the special winning opening to be opened determined in step S296 is the lower special winning opening (step S297), and if it is the lower special winning opening (step S297; YES), It is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation area solenoid control code set in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 is "0" (step S298). If the value of the probability variation area solenoid control code is "0" (step S298) (S298; YES), the value of the probability variation area solenoid control code is set to "1" which is a value corresponding to the probability variation area control pattern setting processing (S299). The probability variation area solenoid control code is a control flag that specifies the position control of the probability variation area lid using the probability variation area solenoid in the probability variation area solenoid control area, and is "0" when the position control of the probability variation area lid is not performed. Is set to "1", and is set to "1" when the position control of the probability variation region lid is started. When it is determined in step S298 that the value of the probability variation area solenoid control code is not "0" (step S298: NO), the jackpot opening preprocessing is ended. Therefore, according to such processing, even if it is determined to open the lower special winning opening, if the value of the probability variation region solenoid control code is not "0", that is, the previous lower special winning opening is opened. When the probability variation area lid corresponding to the round is being controlled, it is possible to prevent the round in which the lower special winning opening is opened from being started.

In step S297, it is determined that the determined special winning opening to be opened is not the lower special winning opening (step S297; NO), or if the processing of step S299 is completed, the opening pattern of the special winning opening according to the type of big hit. The special winning opening opening pattern table determination process for setting is executed (step S300). According to such a process, when it is determined to open the upper special winning opening, since the value of the probability variation area solenoid control code is not referred to, regardless of whether the probability variation area lid is being controlled, You can start the round to open the upper prize hole.

After performing the process of step S300, a solenoid control process for controlling each solenoid is performed (step S301).

After the process of step S301 is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5" which is a value corresponding to the big hit open process (step S302).

After executing the process of step S302, the CPU 103 sets the interval time from when the upper special prize opening is closed to when the lower special prize opening is opened, and when the lower special prize opening is closed, the upper special prize is awarded. An interval time setting process for setting an interval time until the mouth is opened is executed (step S303). After executing the processing of step S303, the CPU 103 ends the jackpot opening preprocessing.

FIG. 9-9 is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed in step S115 of FIG. 9-3 as the big hit opening process. In the big hit opening process shown in FIG. 9-9, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the winning number count value has reached a predetermined maximum winning determination value (step S341). When the maximum winning determination value is not reached in step S341 (step S341; NO), it is determined whether or not an end code is set in the work table before opening the special winning opening (step S342). When it is determined that the end code is not set (step S342; NO), the electric accessory release pattern process is executed (step S343). The electric accessory opening pattern process is a process of controlling opening/closing of the upper special winning opening or the lower special winning opening according to the opening/closing pattern indicated by the special winning opening opening pattern table determined in the processing of step S300 of FIG. 9-8. ..

After performing the process of step S343 in FIG. 9-9, it is determined whether the count switch is on by checking the detection signal transmitted from the count switch or the like (step S344). For example, in the process of step S344, the detection signal transmitted from the count switch of the special winning opening of which the opening/closing control is being performed among the upper special winning opening and the lower special winning opening is checked. Then, when the count switch is off (step S344; NO), the big hit opening process is ended. On the other hand, when the count switch is on (step S344; YES), the winning number count value is updated to be incremented by 1 (step S345), and then the big hit opening process is ended.

When the winning number count value reaches the maximum winning determination value in step S341 (step S341; YES), for example, the driving of the solenoid corresponding to the special winning opening for which opening/closing control is performed is stopped and the big winning is achieved. Settings are made to close the mouth (step S346). For example, when the special winning opening for which the opening/closing control is performed is the upper special winning opening, the setting of closing the upper special winning opening by stopping the driving of the solenoid 82A for the upper special opening door is performed.

After executing the process of step S346 or when it is determined that the end code is set in the process of step S342 (step S342; YES), the round end command is transmitted to the effect control board 12. Is set (step S347).

Next, the CPU 103 determines, based on the round count value, whether or not the round to be ended is a round for opening the lower special winning opening (step S348). Then, when it is determined that the round is to open the lower special winning opening (step S348; YES), the value of the probability variation region solenoid control code is set to "3" which is a value corresponding to the probability variation region control execution process. (Step S349).

After executing the process of step S350, or when it is determined in the process of step S348 that the round is not the one in which the lower special winning opening is opened (step S348; NO), the value of the special figure process flag is changed to the big hit opening post-process. After updating to the corresponding value "6" (step S352), the big hit opening process is ended.

FIG. 9-10 is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed in step S116 of FIG. 9-3 as post-big hit opening process. In the big hit opening post-processing shown in FIGS. 9-10, the CPU 103 first updates the interval timer value so that 1 is subtracted (step S361). At this time, it is determined whether or not the updated interval timer value has become "0" (step S362). When the interval timer value is other than "0" (step S362; NO), the jackpot opening post-process is ended.

When the interval timer value is "0" in step S362 (step S362; YES), it is determined whether the round count value has reached the upper limit round count value (step S363). If the round count value is less than the upper limit round count value (step S363; NO), the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4" which is the value corresponding to the big hit opening preprocessing (step S364). , After the jackpot opening process is completed. In this way, until the round count value is determined to be the upper limit round count value by the processing of step S363, the processing of steps S115 to S116 of FIG. It is possible to execute a plurality of rounds in which is opened.

When it is determined in step S363 that the round count value is the upper limit round count value (step S363; YES), the ending effect time corresponding to the jackpot type is set (step S366). At this time, the big hit flag is cleared and turned off.

9-11 is a figure which shows an ending time table. Referring to FIG. 9-11, as shown in FIGS. 9-11(A) and 9-11(B), respectively, a big hit occurs in a low base state and a big hit occurs in a high base state. The ending effect time is set in advance according to the type of big hit with respect to the continuous winning time.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-11, the CPU 103 makes settings for transmitting a big hit end designation command capable of specifying an ending effect time corresponding to the kind of big hit to the effect control board 12 (step S367). .. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "7" which is a value corresponding to the big hit ending process (step S368), and the big hit opening post-process is ended. Note that the CPU 103 may count the number of continuation of the time saving state and identify the number of continuation of the time saving state by making it possible to identify by the EXT data of the big hit end designation command or the like.

FIG. 9-12 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S117 of FIG. 9-3 as the big hit ending process. In the big hit ending process shown in FIG. 9-12, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the ending effect time has elapsed (step S381). As an example, in the processing of step S365 in the jackpot opening post-processing shown in FIG. 9-10, a timer initial value predetermined corresponding to the ending effect time is set in the game control process timer. In this case, in the process of step S381, for example, the game control process timer value is updated by subtracting 1 or the like, and it is determined whether the updated game control process timer value matches a predetermined waiting time elapsed determination value. Accordingly, it may be determined whether or not the ending effect time has elapsed. When the ending effect time has not elapsed in step S381 (step S381; NO), the jackpot ending process is ended as it is.

On the other hand, when the ending effect time has elapsed in step S381 (step S381; YES), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the passage flag is on (step S382). Here, the passage flag is a flag that is set to an ON state when the probability variation area switch 24A detects passage of the game ball into the probability variation area.

When the passage flag is ON in step S382 (step S382; YES), the probability variation control is started to set the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the probability variation state (step S383). As an example, in the process of step S383, in addition to setting the probability variation flag to the on state, a count initial value corresponding to the upper limit number of special figure games that can be executed in the probability variation state is set in the probability variation counter. .. After that, the passage flag is reset to the off state (step S384). In addition, in the process of step S383, a setting for starting the time saving control in which the average variable display time becomes shorter than the normal state may be executed.

After the processing of step S384 is executed, or when the passage flag is not on in the processing of step S382 (step S382; NO), the setting for starting the high base control is performed (step S385). As an example, in the process of step S385, the time saving flag and the advantageous state flag are set to the ON state, and the preset initial count value corresponding to the upper limit value of the special figure game executable in the time saving state is set. , The special figure variation counter may be set.

After performing the process of step S385, after updating the value of the special figure process flag to "0" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S386), the big hit ending process is ended.

9-13 is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In this effect control process process, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit. .. Of the description of these processes, the same description as that described with reference to FIG. 7 will not be repeated.

The special figure winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "3". In this special figure winning wait process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received. Then, when the hit start designation command is received, if the hit start designation command designates the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to the big hit start processing. To do. When the effect control process timer times out without receiving the hit start designation command, it is determined that the special figure display result in the special figure game is "miss", and the value of the effect process flag is the initial value. Update to "0".

The big hit start process of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "4". In the big hit start process, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to display a screen for notifying the occurrence of the big hit game state on the image display device 5 after the end of the variable display time. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to "5" which is a value corresponding to the processing during the round.

The in-round process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In the processing during this round, the effect control CPU 120 performs display control during the round. Then, when the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round has not ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to "6" which is a value corresponding to the post-round processing. If the final round is finished, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to "7" which is a value corresponding to the post-end processing of the big hit.

The post-round processing of step S176 is processing executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this post-round processing, the effect control CPU 120 performs display control between rounds. Then, when the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to "5" which is a value corresponding to the processing during the round.

The post-big hit completion process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this post-big hit end process, the effect control CPU 120 performs display control in the image display device 5 to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to "0" which is a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process.

FIG. 9-14 is a flowchart showing an example of the special figure winning waiting process executed in step S173 of FIG. 9-13. In the special symbol winning waiting process shown in FIG. 9-14, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a symbol fixing designation command has been received (step S720). When the symbol confirmation designation command is not received (step S720; NO), the special symbol winning waiting process is ended.

When the symbol fixing designation command is received (step S720; YES), the effect control CPU 120 stops and displays the fixed decorative symbol (step S722). Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the confirmed decorative design is a jackpot design (step S723). When the fixed decorative design is not the big hit design (step S723: NO), the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step S726), and the special design winning wait process. To finish.

When the confirmed decorative design is the big hit design (step S723: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hit start designation command has been received (step S730). When the hit start designation command is not received (step S730; NO), the special figure hit waiting process is ended.

When the hit start designation command is received (step S730; YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the fanfare effect as described later with reference to FIG. 9-17 (step S733A), and the fanfare effect time timer. The value is set (step S733B), the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4" corresponding to the big hit start process (step S174) (step S734), and the special figure hit waiting process is ended.

FIG. 9-15 is a flowchart showing details of the big hit start process executed in step S174 of FIG. 9-13. In the big hit start process shown in FIG. 9-15, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not a special winning opening opening notification command is received (step S741). Here, the special winning opening opening notification command is a command for notifying that the special winning opening is in the open state in the big hit game state.

When the special winning opening open notification command is not received (step S741; NO), the effect control CPU 120 executes the fanfare effect execution process shown in FIG. 9-16 (step S742), and ends the big hit start process. .. As an example, in the process of step S742, the value of the process timer is decremented by 1, and the effect device is controlled in accordance with the content of the process data n. For example, in the image display device 5, an effect of displaying a jackpot display pattern and displaying characters or characters indicating that the jackpot has occurred is executed. Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether the process timer has timed out. If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched, and the process data set next in the process table is switched. , Set the process timer set value in the next process data to the process timer and start the process timer.

When the special winning opening opening notification command is received (step S741; YES), the setting for starting the big hit medium effect is performed (step S743). As an example, in the process of step S743, the in-round effect is selected based on the contents of the special winning opening opening notification command, then the process table corresponding to the in-round effect is selected, and the process timer is started.

Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "5" which is a value corresponding to the processing during the round (step S744), and then the jackpot start processing is ended.

FIG. 9-16 is a flowchart showing an example of fanfare production execution processing. Referring to FIG. 9-16, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the fanfare effect time timer value (step 069FS111). Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the fanfare effect time timer value has become 0 (step 069FS112).

When it is determined that the fanfare production time timer value is not 0 (NO in step 069FS112), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the start of the fanfare production time (step 069FS113).

When it is determined that it is the start of the fanfare production time (YES in step 069FS113), the effect control CPU 120 selects the notification effect according to the big hit type and the number of consecutive chanting (step 069FS114), and starts the big hit type suggestion display. (Step 069FS115). The notification effect is an effect for notifying the type of effect executed in the big hit round. The jackpot type suggestion display is a display for suggesting the jackpot type.

When it is determined that it is not the start of the fanfare production time (NO in step 069FS113), and after step 069FS115, the production control CPU 120 determines whether it is the start of the notification production (step 069FS121). The start time of the notification effect is predetermined for each fanfare effect time, and for example, when the fanfare effect time is 13 seconds and 20 seconds, the time is 5 seconds and 7 seconds from the start of the fanfare effect time, respectively. Is.

When it is determined that it is the start time of the notification effect (YES in step 069FS121), the effect control CPU 120 starts execution of the notification effect selected based on the jackpot type (step 069FS122).

When it is determined that it is not the time to start the notification effect (NO in step 069FS121) and after step 069FS122, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the started notification effect is the notification effect that accepts the selection by the player. Is determined (step 069FS123). When it is determined that the player's selection is the notification effect (YES in step 069FS123), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the selection acceptable period in the notification effect (step 069FS124).

When it is determined that the selection is acceptable (YES in step 069FS124), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the selection is accepted (step 069FS125). When it is determined that the selection has been accepted (YES in step 069FS125), the effect control CPU 120 sets the accepted content as the effect content for the jackpot round (step 069FS126).

If it is determined that it is not a notification effect for accepting the player's selection (NO in step 069FS123), it is determined that it is not accepting the selection (NO in step 069FS125) if it is determined that it is not in the selection acceptable period (NO in step 069FS124). In the case, and after step 069FS126, the effect control CPU 120 returns the process to be executed to the calling source of the fanfare effect execution process.

FIG. 9-17 is a timing chart showing an example of a fanfare presentation. Referring to FIG. 9-17, the following is set in the fanfare rendering setting executed in step S733A in FIG. 9-14 described above. When the hit start designation command received in step S730 is a command indicating a 6R normal big hit, in step 733A, as shown in FIG. 9-7, 13 seconds is set as the fanfare effect time, and FIG. ) The effect data is set so that the effect indicated by () is executed.

FIG. 9-17(A) shows a timing chart when it is determined that the 6R normal big hit is decided. First, the jackpot type suggestion display is executed in the first 5 seconds of the fanfare production time. As the jackpot type suggestion display, an image or the like showing that the jackpot type is the 6R normal jackpot is displayed on the image display device 5.

The jackpot type notification effect is executed as the notification effect in 8 seconds from the fifth to the 13th second of the fanfare effect time. The big hit type notification effect is an effect of notifying the confirmed big hit type. From the time when the big hit type suggestion display and the big hit type notification effect are executed, the right-hand hit notification is displayed on the image display device 5 from then on.

When the hit start designation command received in step S730 is a command indicating a 6R probability variation big hit, in step 733A, as shown in FIG. 9-7, 13 seconds is set as the fanfare production time, and FIG. ) Or the effect shown in FIG. 9-17(C) is determined by lottery (for example, it is determined that the effect of FIG. 9-17(B) is executed at a rate of 30%, and 70% of 9-17(C) is determined to be executed, and the effect data is set such that the determined effect is executed.

FIG. 9-17(B) shows a first timing chart when it is determined that the 6R probability variation big hit is determined. First, the jackpot type suggestion display is executed in the first 5 seconds of the fanfare production time. As the jackpot type suggestion display, an image or the like showing that the jackpot type is the 6R normal jackpot is displayed on the image display device 5.

The round promotion effect is executed as the notification effect in 8 seconds from the fifth to the 13th second of the fanfare effect time. The round promotion effect is an effect in which the player is shown to have been promoted from a jackpot having a low advantage to the player to a jackpot having a high advantage to the player. Right hit notification is displayed on the image display device 5 from the time when the big hit type suggestion display and the round promotion effect are executed, and thereafter.

FIG. 9-17(C) shows a second timing chart when it is determined that the 6R probability variation big hit is determined. First, the jackpot type suggestion display is executed in the first 5 seconds of the fanfare production time. As the jackpot type suggestion display, an image or the like indicating that the jackpot type is the 6R probability variation jackpot is displayed on the image display device 5.

The music selection effect is executed as the notification effect in 6 seconds from the fifth to the 11th second of the fanfare effect time. The music selection effect is an effect of selecting the music output during the big hit. The special right-handing notification is executed in 2 seconds from the 11th second to the 13th second of the fanfare production time. The above-mentioned right-handed notification is executed by displaying a small "right-handed" in the upper right part of the image display device 5, whereas the special right-handed notification is displayed in the central part of the image display device 5 by a large right-handed part. It is executed by displaying "Strike". The right hit notification is displayed on the image display device 5 during and after the jackpot type suggestion display, the music selection effect, and the special right hit notification.

If the hit start designation command received in step S730 is a command indicating a 16R probability variable big hit, in step 733A, as shown in FIG. 9-7, 20 seconds is set as the fanfare production time, and FIG. ) The effect data is set so that the effect indicated by () is executed.

FIG. 9-17(D) shows a timing chart when it is determined that the 16R probability variation big hit is determined. First, the jackpot type suggestion display is executed in the first 7 seconds of the fanfare production time. As the jackpot type suggestion display, an image or the like showing that the jackpot type is the 16R probability variation jackpot is displayed on the image display device 5.

In the 13 seconds from the 7th second to the 20th second of the fanfare production time, the music selection production is executed as the notification production. Right hit notification is displayed on the image display device 5 from the time when the jackpot type suggestion display and the music selection effect are executed, and thereafter.

FIG. 9-18 is a screen transition diagram showing the flow of fanfare production. Referring to FIG. 9-18, in the production in the case of 6R probability variation big hit shown in FIG. 9-17(B), as shown in FIG. 9-18(A), as a big hit type suggestion display, 6R normal big hit An image including a character “C big hit” indicating that is displayed on the image display device 5. After that, as shown in FIG. 9-18(B) and FIG. 9-18(C), as a result of the round promotion effect being executed, an image including the characters “B jackpot” indicating that it is a 6R certainty variation jackpot. Is displayed on the image display device 5.

In addition, in the effect in the case of the 16R probability variation big hit shown in FIG. 9-17(D), as shown in FIG. 9-18(D), the 16R probability variation big hit is shown as the jackpot type suggestion display. An image including the characters “big hit” is displayed on the image display device 5. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 9-18(E) and 9-18(F), the music selection effect is executed, and as a result of the player's selection being accepted by the operation of the stick controller 31A, the selected jackpot is selected. An image including a character indicating that the music piece inside is “Music piece G” is displayed on the image display device 5.

It should be noted that, in the case of the 16R probability variable jackpot, as shown in FIG. 9-18(E), there are 10 music choices, but in the case of the 6R probability variable jackpot, there are fewer songs. Number (for example, 3 songs). As shown in FIGS. 9-17(C) and (D), the number of music choices for the 16R certainty variation jackpot is larger than that for the 6R certainty variation jackpot, but since the period of the music selection effect is lengthened, the player Can make it difficult to select songs.

In addition, when the big hits are consecutively changed, it is possible to add music options for the 16R probability variation big hit. The number of options in the first hit may be smaller, the same, or larger than the number of options in the 6R certainty variation big hit.

Further, when the selected music piece is output, a video image is also displayed.

FIG. 9-19 is a flowchart showing details of the in-round process executed in step S175 of FIG. 9-13. In the in-round process shown in FIG. 9-19, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not a special winning opening open designation command has been received (step S751). When the command after opening the special winning opening has not been received (step S751; NO), the effect control CPU 120 makes settings for controlling the effect operation that is a round effect according to the number of rounds (step S752). An ending effect selection second process shown in FIG. 9-20 described later is executed (step S752A). As an example, in the process of step S752, the value of the process timer is decremented by 1, and the effect device is controlled according to the content of the process data n. For example, in the image display device 5, an effect of displaying a jackpot display symbol and displaying characters indicating the number of rounds, other characters, and the like is executed. Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether the process timer has timed out. If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched, and the process data set next in the process table is switched. , Set the process timer set value in the next process data to the process timer and start the process timer.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the jackpot type is the "second jackpot", for example, by reading the EXT data in the jackpot opening notification command transmitted from the main board 11 ( Step S753).

When the big hit type is not the “second big hit” in step S753 (step S753; NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends the in-round process.

On the other hand, when the big hit type is the “second big hit” in step S753 (step 753; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the probability variation confirmation command is received from the main board 11 (step S754). .. Here, the probability variation confirmation command is a command for notifying that the probability variation region switch 24A is turned on and the probability variation state is confirmed.

When the probability variation confirmation command is received in step S754 (step S754; YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the winning effect control (step S755). For example, the effect control CPU 120 executes a winning effect indicating that a game ball has won in the probability variation area as the winning effect control setting.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the winning flag indicating that the game ball has won in the probability variation area during the round game to the on state (step S756).

When the probability variation confirmation command is not received in step S754 (step S754; NO), or after the processing of step S756 is executed, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the setting for starting the instruction effect is performed. It is determined whether or not (step S757). Here, the instruction effect is an effect for instructing the player to perform an operation of launching a game ball to the lower special variable winning ball device 7B.

When the setting for starting the instruction effect (instruction effect start setting) is made in step S757 (step S757; YES), the effect control CPU 120 performs the instruction effect control setting (step S758). For example, the effect control CPU 120 executes an instruction effect as an instruction effect control setting.

When the setting for starting the instructed effect (instruction effect start setting) is not performed in step S757 (step S757; NO), or after the process of step S758 is executed, the effect control CPU 120 gives the notification effect. It is determined whether or not the setting for starting (notification effect start setting) is made (step S759). Here, the notification effect is an effect for notifying that the game ball has passed through the probability variation area.

When the setting for starting the notification effect (notification effect start setting) is made in step S759 (step S759; YES), the effect control CPU 120 performs the notification effect control setting. For example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the notification effect as the notification effect control setting.

When the setting for starting the notification effect (notification effect start setting) is not performed in step S759 (step S759; NO), or after executing the processing of step S759, the effect control CPU 120 causes the processing during the round. To finish.

When the command after opening the special winning opening is received in step S751 (step S751; YES), the effect control CPU 120 makes settings for starting the interval effect based on the content of the command after opening the special winning opening. Perform (step S761). Here, the interval effect is an effect of performing interval display according to the number of rounds. Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the set interval effect and starts the process timer.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to "6" which is the value corresponding to the post-round processing (step S762), and ends the in-round processing.

9-21 is a flowchart showing details of the post-round processing executed in step S176 of FIG. 9-13. In the post-round processing shown in FIG. 9-21, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not a hit end designation command has been received (step S771). Here, the hit end designation command is a command that designates the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state. When the hit end command has not been received (step S771; NO), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the special winning opening opening notification command has been received (step S772).

When the special winning opening opening notification command is not received (step S772; NO), the effect control CPU 120 makes settings for controlling the effect operation that is an interval effect according to the number of rounds (step S773). .. As an example, in the process of step S773, the value of the process timer is decremented by 1, and the effect device is controlled in accordance with the content of the process data n. Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether the process timer has timed out. If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched, and the process data set next in the process table is switched. , Set the process timer set value in the next process data to the process timer and start the process timer.

When the special winning opening opening command is received (step S772; YES), the effect control CPU 120 makes a setting for ending the effect operation that is the interval effect according to the number of rounds (step S774). Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the jackpot type is the "second jackpot", for example, by reading the EXT data in the jackpot opening notification command transmitted from the main board 11 ( Step S775). At this time, if the big hit type is the “second big hit” (step S775; YES), for example, by reading the EXT data in the special winning opening opening notification command transmitted from the main board 11, It is determined whether the number of rounds is 9 (step S776).

When the next round is 9 rounds in step S776 (step S776; YES), the effect control CPU 120 performs setting for starting the instruction effect (instruction effect start setting) (step S777). As an example, in the process of step S777, a process table corresponding to the instruction effect is selected and a process timer is started.

On the other hand, when the next round is not 9 rounds in step S776 (step S776; NO), the effect control CPU 120 reads, for example, the EXT data in the special winning opening opening notification command transmitted from the main board 11 or the like. Thus, it is determined whether the next round is 10 rounds (step S778).

When the next round is 10 rounds in step S778 (step S778; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the winning flag is set to the on state (step S779).

When the winning flag is set to the ON state in step S779 (step S779; YES), the effect control CPU 120 performs the setting for starting the notification effect (notification effect start setting) (step S780). As an example, in the process of step S780, the process table corresponding to the notification effect is selected and the process timer is started.

If the jackpot type is not the “second jackpot” in step S775 (step S775; NO), the next round is not 10 rounds in step S778 (step S778; NO), or the winning flag is on in step S779. If not set (step S779; NO), it is determined whether the next round is any of 13R to 16R (step S783).

When the next round is any of 13R to 16R (step S783; YES), the effect control CPU 120 executes the ending effect selection first process shown in FIG. 9-20 described later.

When the next round is none of 13R to 16R (step S783; NO), the effect control CPU 120 makes settings for starting an effect operation that is a round effect corresponding to the number of rounds (step S781). As an example, in the process of step S781, the process table corresponding to the performance during the round is selected and the process timer is started.

After executing the process of step S777, the process of step S780, the process of step S781, or the process of step S784, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect process flag. The value is updated to "5", which is the value corresponding to the processing during the round (step S782), and the post-round processing is ended.

When the hit end command is received in the process of step S771 (S771; YES), the ending effect is set as described later with reference to FIG. 9-25 (step S782A), and the ending effect time timer value is set. (Step S782B), the value of the effect process flag is updated to "7" which is a value corresponding to the big hit end post-processing (step S781), and the round post-processing is ended.

FIG. 9-20 is a flowchart showing an ending effect selection first process and a second process. Referring to FIG. 9-20, in the ending effect selection first process, first, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the next round is any of 13R to 15R (step 069FS131). When it is determined to be any of 13R to 15R (YES in step 069FS131), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the selection of the type of ending effect has not been accepted (step 069FS132).

When it is determined that the selection of the ending effect type has not been received (YES in step 069FS132), the effect control CPU 120 performs setting for starting the ending effect selection acceptance display (step 069FS133).

If it is determined that the next round is neither 13R nor 15R (NO in step 069FS131), it is determined that the selection of ending effect is accepted (NO in step 069FS132), and after step 069FS133 The control CPU 120 determines whether or not the next round is 16R (step 069FS134).

When it is determined to be 16R (step 069FS134), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the selection of the type of ending effect has not been accepted (step 069FS135). When it is determined that the selection of the ending effect has been accepted (NO in step 069FS135), the setting for starting the effect which notifies the ending effect of the accepted type as the ending effect to be executed is performed (step 069FS136).

When it is determined that the selection of the type of ending effect has not been received (YES in step 069FS135), the effect control CPU 120 starts the effect of notifying the ending effect of the type automatically selected by the lottery as the ending effect to be executed. Is set (step 069FS137).

When it is determined that the next round is not 16R (NO in step 069FS134), after step 069FS136 and after step 069FS137, the effect control CPU 120 returns the processing to be executed to the calling source of this processing.

In the ending effect selection second process, first, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the current round is any of 13R to 15R (step 069FS141). If it is determined to be any of 13R to 15R (YES in step 069FS141), the effect control CPU 120 makes settings for controlling the ending effect selection acceptance display (step 069FS142).

When it is determined that the current round is neither 13R nor 15R (NO in step 069FS141), and after step 069FS142, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the ending effect selection acceptance display is being displayed. (Step 069FS143). When it is determined that it is being displayed (YES in step 069FS143), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the selection of the type of ending effect has been accepted (step 069FS144).

When it is determined that the selection of the type of ending effect is accepted (YES in step 069FS144), the effect control CPU 120 sets the ending effect of the accepted type as the ending effect to be executed (step 069FS145).

When it is determined that the ending effect selection reception display is not being displayed (NO in step 069FS143), selection of the type of ending effect is not accepted (NO in step 069FS144), and after step 069FS145 The control CPU 120 determines whether or not the current round is 16R (step 069FS146). When it is determined to be 16R (YES in step 069FS146), the effect control CPU 120 makes settings for controlling the effect that notifies the ending effect to be executed (step 069FS147).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the current round is not 16R (NO in step 069FS146) and after step 069FS147, the effect control CPU 120 returns the process to be executed to the calling source of this process.

FIG. 9-22 is a flowchart showing an example of post-big hit completion processing executed in step S177 of FIG. 9-13. In the big hit end post-processing shown in FIG. 9-22, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the ending effect time timer value (step S770), and determines whether or not the ending effect time timer value has become 0 ( Step S771). That is, it is determined whether or not the ending effect time timer has timed out (whether or not the ending effect time has elapsed). When the ending effect time timer value is not 0 (step S771; NO), an ending effect execution process shown in FIG. 9-23 described later is executed (step S772), and the post-big hit process is ended. When the ending effect time timer value becomes 0 (step S771; YES), the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step S773), and the big hit ends. The post-processing ends.

FIG. 9-23 is a flowchart showing an example of ending effect execution processing. With reference to FIG. 9-23, the CPU 120 for effect control subtracts 1 from the ending effect time timer value (step 069FS151). Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the ending effect time timer value has become 0 (step 069FS152).

When it is determined that the ending effect time timer value is not 0 (NO in step 069FS152), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the ending effect time is started (step 069FS153).

When it is determined that it is the start of the ending effect time (YES in step 069FS153), the effect control CPU 120 starts executing the ending effect of the set type. (Step 069FS154).

When it is determined that it is not the start time of the ending effect time (NO in step 069FS153), and after step 069FS154, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the ending effect being executed is an ending effect that accepts the selection by the player. It is determined whether or not (step 069FS156). When it is determined that it is the ending effect that accepts the selection by the player (YES in step 069FS156), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the selection acceptable period in the ending effect (step 069FS157).

When it is determined that it is the selection acceptable period (YES in step 069FS157), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the selection is accepted (step 069FS158). When it is determined that the selection is accepted (YES in step 069FS158), the effect control CPU 120 sets the accepted content as the effect content after the big hit (step 069FS159).

If it is determined that it is not the ending effect that accepts the player's selection (NO in step 069FS156), it is determined that it is not accepting the selection (NO in step 069FS158) if it is determined that it is not in the selection acceptable period (NO in step 069FS157). In the case, and after step 069FS159, the effect control CPU 120 returns the process to be executed to the calling source of the ending effect execution process.

FIG. 9-24 is a screen transition diagram illustrating a flow of selecting an ending effect type. Referring to FIG. 9-24, in FIG. 9-24(A), the current round number is reached when the jackpot 13 to 15 rounds are executed by executing the processing shown in FIG. 9-20. In addition to the characters that indicate the total number of balls won in the jackpot, an image that includes characters that prompt the player to select the type of effect at the ending, and the type of effect at the ending. An image including the characters of the options is displayed on the image display device 5. When this screen is displayed, the player can select the type of effect at the ending by operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. In addition, when the push button 31B is not operated before the selectable period of 15 rounds ends, the type of option in the selected state is selected as the type of effect at the ending.

Next, in FIG. 9-24(A), by performing the processing shown in FIG. 9-20, when the final 16 rounds of the jackpot, the character indicating the current round number and the jackpot are displayed. An image including a character indicating the type of the selected ending effect is displayed on the image display device 5 in addition to the character indicating the total number of the acquired balls.

FIG. 9-25 is a timing chart showing an example of ending effects. Referring to FIG. 9-25, FIG. 9-25(A) shows a case where the ending effect of effect pattern A is executed at the time of first hit. At the time of the first hit, the effect pattern A is automatically selected. The effect pattern A is an ending effect effect pattern for selecting the contents of the effect contents in the early stage, the middle game, and the end game in the high base state after the big hit.

When the big hit round ends and the ending effect time starts, first, an introduction effect indicating that the ending effect starts in 2 seconds from 0 seconds to 2 seconds is executed. Next, 5 seconds from the second second to the seventh second is a selection period A for selecting the effect content in the early stage of the effect content after the big hit, and the effect of accepting the selection of the effect content in the early stage from the player. Is executed.

Similarly, for 5 seconds from the 7th to 12th seconds and 5 seconds from the 12th to 17th seconds, to select the midfield and the final stage of the production contents after the big hit, respectively. In the selection period B and the selection period C, the effects for accepting the selection of the effect contents in the middle game and the end game from the player are executed.

In the next 3 seconds from the 17th to the 20th, the effect of displaying the result selected in the selection period A to the selection period C is executed. In the 3 seconds from the 20th to the 23rd, the introduction effect indicating that the probability variation mode starts is executed. In the five seconds from the 23rd to the 28th, the image display device 5 displays a caution display including a display for preventing forgetting to take out the prepaid card and a display for preventing the player from being absorbed in the game. The company logo showing the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed on the image display device 5 in 4 seconds from the 28th to the 32nd. In the final 32 seconds to the 34th second of the ending effect time, the probability variation mode entry effect indicating that the probability variation mode is entered is executed in 2 seconds.

FIG. 9-25(B) shows a case where the ending effect of effect pattern A is executed during continuous chang. At the time of consecutive chanting, the player can select the type of ending effect executed during the ending effect time from the 13th round to the 16th round of a big hit.

When the big hit round ends and the ending effect time starts, first, an introduction effect indicating that the ending effect starts in 2 seconds from 0 seconds to 2 seconds is executed. Next, 10 seconds from the second second to the 12th second is a selection period A for selecting the early stage effect content from the effect content after the big hit, and the effect of accepting the selection of the early stage effect content from the player Is executed.

Similarly, for the 10 seconds from the 12th to the 22nd seconds and the 10 seconds from the 22nd to the 32nd seconds, to select the midfield and the final stage of the production contents after the big hit, respectively. In the selection period B and the selection period C, the effects for accepting the selection of the effect contents in the middle game and the end game from the player are executed.

In the next 5 seconds from the 32nd to the 37th seconds, the effect of displaying the result selected in the selection period A to the selection period C is executed. In the 5 seconds from the 37th to the 42nd, the introduction effect indicating that the probability variation mode starts is executed. The probability variation mode entry effect that indicates entry into the probability variation mode is executed in the final three seconds from the 42nd to the 45th seconds of the ending effect time.

In the case where the effect pattern E is selected from the effect pattern B, among the ending effects of the effect pattern A shown in FIG. 9-25, the effect of the selection period A to the selection period C and the effect of displaying the selection result are: The effect patterns B to E are changed to different effects. The length of the effect of the part that includes the player's intervention elements included in the effect patterns A to E is different, but the ending effect time is the same as the length at which the big hit symbol is displayed in the probability variation mode entry effect. Is adjusted to.

FIG. 9-26 is a screen transition diagram illustrating the flow of ending effects. With reference to FIG. 9-26, when the effect pattern A is selected, the screen shown in FIG. 9-26(A) is displayed on the image display device 5 in the selection period A. The screen shown in FIG. 9-26(A) includes an image including characters for prompting the selection of the effect contents in the early stage among the effect contents after the big hit and characters indicating options.

After the selection period A, the screens shown in FIGS. 9-26B and 9C are displayed on the image display device 5 in the selection period B and the selection period C, respectively. The screens shown in FIGS. 9-26(B) and (C) each include an image including characters for prompting selection of effect contents in the middle and end of the effect contents after the big hit and characters indicating options. Be done.

During the selection result display period after the selection period C, the screen shown in FIG. 9-26(D) is displayed on the image display device 5. The screen shown in FIG. 9-26(D) includes an image including characters indicating the selection result of the early stage, the middle stage, and the final stage of the effect content after the big hit.

The effect pattern B can be output during a high base state after a big hit, by executing a predetermined game (here, the Amida lottery game) that requires a player's operation (here, selecting an option), and depending on the result of the game. It is a production pattern of ending production that changes the number of songs that can be selected by the player among the various songs. When the effect pattern B is selected, instead of the effect of displaying the selection period A to the selection period C shown in FIG. 9-25 and the effect of displaying the selection result, FIG. 9-26 (E) and FIG. 9-26 (F ), the effect of executing the Amida Lottery game is executed.

On the screen shown in FIG. 9-26(E), an image of the first half of the Amida lottery, characters of the choices at the start point of the Amida lottery, characters prompting the player to select the choices, and characters following the route of the Amida lottery Images are included. After the option is selected by the player and the image of the character starts moving along the route of the Amida lottery from the selected start point, the screen of FIG. 9-26(F) is displayed.

The screen shown in FIG. 9-26(F) includes an image of the second half of the Amida lottery, characters indicating the game result of the Amida lottery goal point, and an image of the character who has reached the goal point by following the Amida lottery route. .. Depending on the result of the game, the number of songs that the player can select among the songs that can be output during the high base state after the big hit is changed. For example, as a result of the Amida Lottery game, when the goal point of "add two songs" is reached, two songs are added to the number of songs that the player can select. When the player has reached the “out of bounds” goal point, the number of songs that the player can select is maintained as is.

The total number of songs that can be output during the high base state, which is prestored in the pachinko gaming machine 1, is 10. Two songs can be selected at the first hit. After that, as a result of the effect pattern B being selected in the ending effect period of the jackpot of consecutive chans, the number of pieces of music indicated by the result of the executed game is added. When the number of selectable music pieces reaches the total number of music pieces (here, 10 music pieces), the effect pattern B cannot be selected. After the effect pattern B becomes unselectable, an effect pattern E described later can be selected instead of the effect pattern B.

For the effect pattern C, a predetermined game (here, a trump game) that requires a player's operation (here, selection of an option) is executed, and the ending suggesting the set value shown in the modified example is indicated by the result of the game. It is a production pattern of production. Details regarding the setting values will be described in modification examples regarding the setting shown in FIG. As shown in the modified example of setting, it is configured to be able to set to one of the set values of multiple stages based on the setting operation, and it is possible to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value In the case of the above configuration, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state varies depending on the set value. Since the player expects to be controlled in an advantageous state, by executing an ending effect that suggests a set value, the player can be made to pay attention to the ending effect. When the effect pattern C is selected, instead of the effect for displaying the effect and the selection result of the selection period A to the selection period C shown in FIG. 9-25, FIG. 9-26(G) and FIG. 9-26(H ), the effect of executing the card game is executed.

The screen shown in FIG. 9-26(G) includes an image of playing card choices, and characters prompting the player to select the choices. After the option is selected by the player and the operation of turning over the selected playing card is executed, the screen of FIG. 9-26(H) is displayed.

The screen shown in FIG. 9-26(H) includes an image of the options of the non-selected playing card and an image of the playing card in which the image of the contents selected and turned over to suggest the setting value is drawn. .. The setting value is suggested according to the content of the image of the playing card (for example, content of character, type of character). For example, in the case of the character “may be set”, it is suggested that the set value is likely to be a high set value. In addition, it is indicated that the set value is likely to be a high set value in the case of a specific type of character. It should be noted that the effect pattern C cannot be selected during a continuous change when the setting suggestion is executed.

The effect pattern D is a mini game that requires a player's operation, which indicates whether or not there is a pending storage that is determined to be a big hit among the currently stored pending memories (so-called continuous holding). It is a production pattern of an ending production that executes production. When the effect pattern D is selected, the effect of executing the mini game of the effect pattern D is executed instead of the effect of displaying the selection period C and the effect of the selection period C shown in FIG. 9-25. ..

The effect pattern E is a selection pattern that can be selected after all songs can be selected in the effect pattern B, or after the number of consecutive chan reaches a specific number (for example, 15 times), and is operated by the player. This is an ending effect production pattern in which an image that is not normally displayed (for example, a premium image) is displayed when the game is successful as a result of executing a required predetermined mini game. As shown in (A) of FIG. 9-24, the option of the effect pattern E is displayed in the unselectable state, but is displayed in a mode indicating that it is not selectable, and is in the selectable state. After that, it is displayed in a mode showing that it is selectable.

(Regarding a modified example of the characteristic part 069F)
(1) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-19 to FIG. 9-25, the type of ending effect is before the ending effect during the big hit (for example, 13 rounds to 16 rounds). It was selected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of ending effect may be selected during the ending effect.

FIG. 9-27 is a timing chart showing an example of ending effects in the modified example. Referring to FIG. 9-27, in the above-described embodiment, the effect for selecting the effect pattern of the ending effect, which is executed before the ending effect during the big hit, is 0 second of the ending effect time. To 10 seconds from 10 to 10 seconds. The effect to be executed thereafter is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 9-25(B).

(2) In this way, in the first half period of the ending effect, the type of the effect executed in the latter half period may be selected as the related effect related to the effect executed in the latter half period.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as the related effect, an explanation effect (for example, a description of how to play) of an effect (for example, a mini game effect) that is executed in the latter half period may be executed. You may make it perform the introduction production of the production performed by. Further, in this case, the shorter ending effect time may have only the latter half period without the first half period.

Further, in this case, when the same effect pattern is repeatedly selected in a series of big hits, the first half period may be shortened and the second half period may be lengthened. Further, the first half period may be shortened, the second half period may be the same length, and the effect for time adjustment may be executed in the remaining period. This makes it possible to give the illusion that the ending period has been shortened.

(3) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-5(B), step S269 of FIG. 9-6, step S270, and FIG. A longer time is selected as the fanfare production time than the probability variation big hit or the 6R regular big hit. In addition, the jackpot of consecutive chan is selected to have a long time as a fanfare production time at a higher rate than the jackpot of the first hit. Further, the long time as a fanfare production time is higher in the case of being controlled as a big hit as a result of the variable display of the second special symbol than in the case of being controlled as a big hit as a result of the variable display of the first special symbol. I chose to select.

However, as described above, if the fanfare production time is determined, it may be determined by another method. Here, in the former case, a long time is selected as the fanfare production time at a rate of 0%, and in the latter case, a long time is selected as the fanfare production time at a rate of 100%. However, the ratio is not limited to the above and may be any other ratio as long as the latter ratio is higher than the former ratio.

(4) In the embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 9-5(B), step S366 in FIG. 9-10, step S367, and FIG. A longer time is selected as the ending effect time at a higher rate than the probability variation big hit or the 6R regular big hit. In addition, rather than the big hit at the first hit, the long win of the consecutive chan is selected at a high ratio as the ending effect time. In addition, a long time as the ending effect time is higher in the case where the big hit is controlled as a result of the variable display of the second special symbol than in the big hit as a result of the variable display of the first special symbol. I chose to select.

However, as described above, if the ending effect time is determined, it may be determined by another method. Here, in the former case, a long time is selected as the ending effect time at a rate of 0%, and in the latter case, a long time is selected as the ending effect time at a rate of 100%. However, the ratio is not limited to the above and may be any other ratio as long as the latter ratio is higher than the former ratio.

(5) In the above-described embodiment, the effect patterns A to E of the ending effect include the intervention elements of the player (for example, effects that cause the player to operate the operation unit). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and one of the effect patterns may not include the player's intervention element. For example, the effect pattern E is an effect pattern that does not include a mini game that requires a player's operation, and is an ending effect in which an image that is not normally displayed (for example, a premium image) is displayed without the player's operation. It may be a production pattern.

(6) In the above-described embodiment, there is no limit to the number of continuous probability variation states. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a limit may be set so that the number of continuous probability change states is the predetermined limit number. In this case, the effect pattern of the ending effect may include an effect pattern including a mini game effect that indicates the remaining number of times of the probability variation state up to the predetermined limit number.

(7) The effect in the high base state after the big hit may be a common effect in which it is difficult or impossible to determine whether the state is the probable variation state or the non-probability variation state. In this case, the ending effect production pattern may include a production pattern including a mini game production that suggests whether or not the probability change state will occur after a big hit.

(8) At the start of the ending effect time, the movable body 32 may be operated to perform an effect of appealing to the player the number of prize balls obtained during the big hit, and then the ending effect described above may be executed. .. As a result, the ending effect can be lengthened by the operation period of the movable body 32.

(9) In a special big hit (for example, a big hit when the number of consecutive chan has reached 20 times), a special video may be displayed without executing the ending effect described above. This special video may be displayed from the start of the big fanfare production period, may be displayed after the end of the fanfare production period, or may be displayed from the start of the ending production period. You may In this way, the ending effect described above may not be executed when a special condition is satisfied.

(10) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-11, the ending effect time is the same for the 6R normal big hit and the 6R probability variation big hit, and as shown in FIG. 9-25. , The ending production with the same time allocation is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the 6R normal big hit, the selection period of the effect after the big hit may not be provided, and the ending effect time may be shorter than the 6R sure variation big hit.

(11) In FIGS. 9-26(A) to (C), the options of the effect contents after the big hit are shown. With regard to this option, the 16R certainty variation jackpot may have more options than the 6R certainty variation jackpot. Further, as the number of consecutive chan is increased, the number of options may be increased. As shown in FIG. 9-25, at the time of 16R probability variation big hit or during continuous chan, the selection period A to the selection period C are lengthened, so even if there are many choices, the player can choose from the choices after the big hit. It becomes easy to select the effect contents.

(Explanation of Invention Regarding Characteristic Section 069F)
(1-1-1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
As the advantageous state, at least a first advantageous state (for example, 16 round jackpot, probability variation jackpot) and a second advantageous state (eg, 6 round jackpot, normal jackpot) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. A game state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled by any of the above,
The end effect selecting unit that selects a longer period in the first advantageous state as a finish effect period (for example, ending effect time) at the end of the advantageous state at a higher rate than in the second advantageous state ( For example, the game control microcomputer 100, step S366 of FIG. 9-10, FIG. 9-11),
End effect production means capable of executing end effect (for example, ending effect) during the end effect period (for example, effect control CPU 120, step S772 of FIG. 9-22, FIGS. 9-23 to 9-26). With and
The end time effect executing means is capable of executing one of a plurality of types of end time effects (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E) during the end effect time period in the first advantageous state,
An end time effect capable of accepting from the player a selection of an end time effect executed by the end time effect executing means from among a plurality of kinds of end time effects that can be executed in the end time effect period in the first advantageous state. Receiving means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control, stick controller 31A, push button 31B. It may be another operation unit for setting. Step S752A in FIG. 9-19, step in FIG. 9-20, step in FIG. 9-21. S784: The period in which the selection can be accepted may be the first half of the end effect period or the second half of the jackpot round. Specifically, in the 16R jackpot, a 13R start command is received. It may be a period from when the completion command of 16R is received to when the completion command of 16R is received.).

With such a configuration, the period in which the advantageous state is controlled can be lengthened, so that the gaming value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. In addition, the player can select an end effect that is executed when the advantageous state ends. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the decrease in the interest of the game due to the extension due to the longer period at the end of the advantageous state.

(1-1-2) It is possible to control to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state), and after the advantageous state ends, a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a probability change state, a time saving state, a high state). A gaming machine that can be controlled to a base state (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
Normal state (for example, normal state), the special state, the advantageous state, a first advantageous state (for example, 16 round big hit, probability variation big hit), and a second disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. A game state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling at least one of an advantageous state (for example, 6 rounds of big hits, a normal big hit),
The case where the advantageous state is controlled when the special state is controlled, rather than the case where the advantageous state is controlled when the normal state is controlled (for example, a so-called first hit big hit) (For example, in the case of a so-called consecutive jackpot), an end time effect selecting means (for example, an end effect selecting means for selecting a long period at a high rate as an end effect time period at the end of the advantageous state (for example, ending effect time)). The game control microcomputer 100, step S366 of FIG. 9-10, and FIG. 9-11),
End effect production means capable of executing end effect (for example, ending effect) during the end effect period (for example, effect control CPU 120, step S772 of FIG. 9-22, FIGS. 9-23 to 9-26). With and
The end time effect executing means is capable of executing one of a plurality of types of end time effects (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E) during the end effect time period in the first advantageous state,
An end time effect that can be accepted from the player to select an end time effect executed by the end time effect executing means from among a plurality of kinds of end time effects that can be executed in the end effect time period of the first advantageous state. Receiving means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control, stick controller 31A, push button 31B. It may be another operation unit for setting. Step S752A in FIG. 9-19, step in FIG. 9-20, step in FIG. 9-21. S784.) is further provided.

With such a configuration, the period in which the advantageous state is controlled can be lengthened, so that the gaming value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. In addition, the player can select an end effect that is executed when the advantageous state ends. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the decrease in the interest of the game due to the extension due to the longer period at the end of the advantageous state.

(1-1-3) First special identification information (for example, first special symbol) as the special identification information (for example, special symbol) and second special identification information that is more advantageous to the player than the first special identification information ( For example, it is possible to execute a variable display of the second special symbol), it is possible to control an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state), and a special state different from the advantageous state after the end of the advantageous state ( For example, a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in a probability changing state, a time saving state, a high base state,
First reserved storage means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, RAM 102) capable of storing information regarding variable display of the first special identification information as first reserved storage information (for example, first reserved storage);
Second reserved storage means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, RAM 102) capable of storing information regarding variable display of the second special identification information as second reserved storage information (for example, second reserved storage),
When the first reserved storage information and the second reserved storage information are both stored, the variable display of the second special identification information based on the second reserved storage information is changed to the variable display of the first special identification information. Variable display control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, see FIG. 9-4) to be executed with priority over the display,
As the advantageous state, at least a first advantageous state (for example, 16 round jackpot, probability variation jackpot) and a second advantageous state (eg, 6 round jackpot, normal jackpot) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. A game state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled by any of the above,
The advantageous state is controlled when the advantageous state is controlled as a result of the variable display of the second reserved storage information, rather than when the advantageous state is controlled as a result of the variable display of the first reserved storage information. End effect selecting means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, step S366 in FIG. 9-10, FIG. 9-) that selects a long period at a high rate as an end effect period (for example, ending effect time) at the end of 11),
End effect production means capable of executing end effect (for example, ending effect) during the end effect period (for example, effect control CPU 120, step S772 of FIG. 9-22, FIGS. 9-23 to 9-26). With and
The end time effect executing means is capable of executing one of a plurality of types of end time effects (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E) during the end effect time period in the first advantageous state,
An end time effect that can be accepted from the player to select an end time effect executed by the end time effect executing means from among a plurality of kinds of end time effects that can be executed in the end effect time period of the first advantageous state. Receiving means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control, stick controller 31A, push button 31B. It may be another operation unit for setting. Step S752A in FIG. 9-19, step in FIG. 9-20, step in FIG. 9-21. S784.) is further provided.

With such a configuration, the period in which the advantageous state is controlled can be lengthened, so that the gaming value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. In addition, the player can select an end effect that is executed when the advantageous state ends. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the decrease in the interest of the game due to the extension due to the longer period at the end of the advantageous state.

(1-2-1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
As the advantageous state, at least a first advantageous state (for example, 16 round jackpot, probability variation jackpot) and a second advantageous state (eg, 6 round jackpot, normal jackpot) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. A game state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled by any of the above,
The end advantageous effect selecting means (for example, a game control microcomputer, which selects a long period in which the first advantageous state is longer than the second advantageous state as the end effect period at the end of the advantageous state at a high rate. 100, step S366 of FIG. 9-10, FIG. 9-11),
End effect production means capable of executing end effect during the end effect period (for example, effect control CPU 120, step S772 of FIG. 9-22, FIG. 9-23 to FIG. 9-26),
The end time effect executing means is capable of executing one of a plurality of types of end time effects (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E) during the end effect time period in the first advantageous state,
All of the plurality of types of end effects that can be executed in the end effect period of the first advantageous state include player intervention elements (for example, operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B) (for example, effect patterns. All of A to effect pattern E are effect modes that accept the operation of the player).

With such a configuration, the period in which the advantageous state is controlled can be lengthened, so that the gaming value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. Moreover, the player's intervention element is included in the finish production performed in the finish production period longer than the reference period. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of extension due to a longer period at the end of the advantageous state.

(1-2-2) It is possible to control to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state), and after the advantageous state ends, a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a probable variation state, a time saving state, a high state). A gaming machine that can be controlled to a base state (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
It is possible to control to at least one of a normal state (for example, a normal state), the special state, the advantageous state, a first advantageous state, and a second advantageous state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. A game state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100),
The case where the advantageous state is controlled when the special state is controlled, rather than the case where the advantageous state is controlled when the normal state is controlled (for example, a so-called first hit big hit) The end effect selecting means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, which selects a long period at a high rate as the end effect period at the end of the advantageous state) (for example, in the case of a so-called consecutive jackpot) 9-10, step S366 of FIG. 9-10,
End effect production means capable of executing end effect during the end effect period (for example, effect control CPU 120, step S772 of FIG. 9-22, FIG. 9-23 to FIG. 9-26),
The end time effect executing means is capable of executing one of a plurality of types of end time effects (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E) during the end effect time period in the first advantageous state,
All of the plurality of types of end effects that can be executed in the end effect period of the first advantageous state include player intervention elements (for example, operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B) (for example, effect patterns. All of A to effect pattern E are effect modes that accept the operation of the player).

With such a configuration, the period in which the advantageous state is controlled can be lengthened, so that the gaming value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. Moreover, the player's intervention element is included in the finish production performed in the finish production period longer than the reference period. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of extension due to a longer period at the end of the advantageous state.

(1-2-3) First special identification information (for example, first special symbol) as special identification information (for example, special symbol) and second special identification information that is more advantageous to the player than the first special identification information ( For example, it is possible to execute a variable display of the second special symbol), it is possible to control an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state), and a special state different from the advantageous state after the end of the advantageous state ( For example, a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in a probability changing state, a time saving state, a high base state,
First reserved storage means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, RAM 102) capable of storing information regarding variable display of the first special identification information as first reserved storage information (for example, first reserved storage);
Second reserved storage means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, RAM 102) capable of storing information regarding variable display of the second special identification information as second reserved storage information (for example, second reserved storage),
When the first reserved storage information and the second reserved storage information are both stored, the variable display of the second special identification information based on the second reserved storage information is changed to the variable display of the first special identification information. Variable display control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B) to be executed with priority over the display,
As the advantageous state, a game state control means capable of controlling at least one of a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100). When,
The advantageous state is controlled when the advantageous state is controlled as a result of the variable display of the second reserved storage information, rather than when the advantageous state is controlled as a result of the variable display of the first reserved storage information. End effect selecting means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, step S366 in FIG. 9-10, FIG. 9-11) that selects a long period at a high rate as the end effect period at the end of FIG.
End effect production means capable of executing end effect during the end effect period (for example, effect control CPU 120, step S772 of FIG. 9-22, FIG. 9-23 to FIG. 9-26),
The end time effect executing means is capable of executing one of a plurality of types of end time effects (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E) during the end effect time period in the first advantageous state,
All of the plurality of types of end effects that can be executed in the end effect period of the first advantageous state include player intervention elements (for example, operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B) (for example, effect patterns. All of A to effect pattern E are effect modes that accept the operation of the player).

With such a configuration, the period in which the advantageous state is controlled can be lengthened, so that the gaming value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. Moreover, the player's intervention element is included in the finish production performed in the finish production period longer than the reference period. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of extension due to a longer period at the end of the advantageous state.

(1-3-1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
As the advantageous state, at least a first advantageous state (for example, 16 round jackpot, probability variation jackpot) and a second advantageous state (eg, 6 round jackpot, normal jackpot) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. A game state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled by any of the above,
The end advantageous effect selecting means (for example, a game control microcomputer, which selects a long period in which the first advantageous state is longer than the second advantageous state as the end effect period at the end of the advantageous state at a high rate. 100, step S366 of FIG. 9-10, FIG. 9-11),
An end time effect executing means capable of executing an end time effect during the end time effect period (for example, effect control CPU 120, step S772 in FIG. 9-22, and FIG. 9-23 to FIG. 9-26);
During the selection effect period after the end effect period has been selected, in the end effect period, a selection of the effect contents from a plurality of types of effect contents is received from the player. Means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control, stick controller 31A, push button 31B. It may be another operation unit for setting. Step 069FS156 to step 069FS159 in FIG. 9-23).
The selection period of the ending production period of the first advantageous state is longer than the selection period of the ending production period of the second advantageous state (for example, 6R as shown in FIG. 9-25). 16R probability variation jackpot is longer than the probability variation jackpot, the production selection period after the jackpot is longer.)

With such a configuration, the period in which the advantageous state is controlled can be lengthened, so that the gaming value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. In addition, by lengthening the selection period of the effect contents after the end effect period, it is easier to recognize the effect contents, but it is difficult to give the player a feeling of delay due to the longer period at the end of the advantageous state. can do.

(1-3-2) It is possible to control to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state), and after the advantageous state ends, a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a probable variation state, a time saving state, a high state). A gaming machine that can be controlled to a base state (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
It is possible to control at least one of a normal state (for example, a normal state), the special state, the advantageous state, a first advantageous state, and a second advantageous state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. A game state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100),
The case where the advantageous state is controlled when the special state is controlled, rather than the case where the advantageous state is controlled when the normal state is controlled (for example, a so-called first hit big hit) The end effect selecting means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, which selects a long period at a high rate as the end effect period at the end of the advantageous state) (for example, in the case of a so-called consecutive jackpot) 9-10, step S366 of FIG. 9-10,
An end time effect executing means capable of executing an end time effect during the end time effect period (for example, effect control CPU 120, step S772 in FIG. 9-22, and FIG. 9-23 to FIG. 9-26);
During the selection effect period after the end effect period has been selected, in the end effect period, a selection of the effect contents from a plurality of types of effect contents is received from the player. Means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control, stick controller 31A, push button 31B. It may be another operation unit for setting. Step 069FS156 to step 069FS159 in FIG. 9-23).
The selection period of the ending production period of the first advantageous state is longer than the selection period of the ending production period of the second advantageous state (for example, 6R as shown in FIG. 9-25). 16R probability variation jackpot is longer than the probability variation jackpot, the production selection period after the jackpot is longer.)

With such a configuration, the period in which the advantageous state is controlled can be lengthened, so that the gaming value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. In addition, by lengthening the selection period of the effect contents after the end effect period, it is easier to recognize the effect contents, but it is difficult to give the player a feeling of delay due to the longer period at the end of the advantageous state. can do.

(1-3-3) First special identification information (for example, first special symbol) as the special identification information (for example, special symbol) and second special identification information that is more advantageous to the player than the first special identification information ( For example, it is possible to execute a variable display of the second special symbol), it is possible to control an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state), and a special state different from the advantageous state after the end of the advantageous state ( For example, a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in a probability changing state, a time saving state, a high base state,
First reserved storage means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, RAM 102) capable of storing information regarding variable display of the first special identification information as first reserved storage information (for example, first reserved storage);
Second reserved storage means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, RAM 102) capable of storing information regarding variable display of the second special identification information as second reserved storage information (for example, second reserved storage),
When the first reserved storage information and the second reserved storage information are both stored, the variable display of the second special identification information based on the second reserved storage information is changed to the variable display of the first special identification information. Variable display control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B) to be executed with priority over the display,
As the advantageous state, a game state control means capable of controlling at least one of a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100). When,
The advantageous state is controlled when the advantageous state is controlled as a result of the variable display of the second reserved storage information, rather than when the advantageous state is controlled as a result of the variable display of the first reserved storage information. End effect selecting means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, step S366 in FIG. 9-10, FIG. 9-11) that selects a long period at a high rate as the end effect period at the end of FIG.
An end time effect executing means capable of executing an end time effect during the end time effect period (for example, effect control CPU 120, step S772 in FIG. 9-22, and FIG. 9-23 to FIG. 9-26);
During the selection effect period after the end effect period has been selected, in the end effect period, a selection of the effect contents from a plurality of types of effect contents is received from the player. Means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control, stick controller 31A, push button 31B. It may be another operation unit for setting. Step 069FS156 to step 069FS159 in FIG. 9-23).
The selection period of the ending production period of the first advantageous state is longer than the selection period of the ending production period of the second advantageous state (for example, 6R as shown in FIG. 9-25). 16R probability variation jackpot is longer than the probability variation jackpot, the production selection period after the jackpot is longer.)

With such a configuration, the period in which the advantageous state is controlled can be lengthened, so that the gaming value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. In addition, by lengthening the selection period of the effect contents after the end effect period, it is easier to recognize the effect contents, but it is difficult to give the player a feeling of delay due to the longer period at the end of the advantageous state. can do.

(1-4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1-1-1) to (1-3-3) above,
An operation detecting means for detecting an operation by the player (for example, CPU 120 for effect control, stick controller 31A, push button 31B, step 069FS158 of FIG. 9-23) is further provided,
The end time effect executing means executes an effect as an intervention element in an effect mode that requires detection of a motion by the motion detecting means during an execution period, when executing any of a plurality of kinds of end time effects ( For example, all of the effect patterns A to E are effect modes in which the operation of the player is accepted.

According to such a configuration, since there is an intervention element by the player, it is possible to make it difficult to give the player a feeling of extension.

(1-5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1-1-1) to (1-3-3) above,
An operation detecting means for detecting an operation by the player (for example, CPU 120 for effect control, stick controller 31A, push button 31B, step 069FS158 of FIG. 9-23) is further provided,
As the intervention element, the end-time effect executing means executes the end-time effect in one of an effect mode that requires detection of an operation by the operation detecting means during an execution period and an effect mode that does not require detection (for example, Any of the effect patterns A to E may be an effect mode in which the player's operation is not accepted).

According to such a configuration, since there is an intervention element by the player, it is possible to make it difficult to give the player a feeling of extension.

(1-6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1-1-1) to (1-5) above,
(The end time effect executing means can execute any one of a plurality of types of end time effects (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E) in the end effect time period of the first advantageous state, )
(An end-time effect executed by the end-time effect execution means from among a plurality of types of end-time effects (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E) that can be executed in the end-time effect period in the first advantageous state. End effect receiving means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control, stick controller 31A, push button 31B. Other operation unit for setting may be used. Step S752A in FIG. 9-19, FIG. 9-20, further including step S784 of FIG. 9-21.),)
A plurality of types of end effects are selected by the end effect reception means a predetermined number of times (for example, once or a plurality of times) until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a so-called continuous channel). (While still ending), it includes an end-time production in which selection cannot be accepted (for example, production pattern B is not selectable during continuous chanting when all songs are released). ..

According to such a configuration, a variety of effects are produced, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of delay.

(1-7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1-1-1) to (1-5) above,
(The end time effect executing means can execute any one of a plurality of types of end time effects (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E) in the end effect time period of the first advantageous state, )
(End-time production reception that receives from the player a selection of an end-time production executed by the end-time production execution means from among a plurality of types of end-time productions that can be executed in the end production period of the first advantageous state. Means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control, stick controller 31A, push button 31B. It may be another operation unit for setting. Step S752A in FIG. 9-19, step S784 in FIG. 9-20, and step S784 in FIG. 9-21. .) is further provided,)
For a plurality of types of end effects, when the effect result is a specific result (for example, success), the selection is not accepted until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, until so-called consecutive chan ends). It includes an end effect that is disabled (for example, when the setting suggestion is executed, the effect pattern C is not selectable during continuous chanting).

According to such a configuration, a variety of effects are produced, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of delay.

(1-8) In the gaming machine of (1-6) or (1-7) above,
(The end time effect executing means can execute any one of a plurality of types of end time effects (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E) in the end effect time period of the first advantageous state, )
(End-time production reception that receives from the player a selection of an end-time production executed by the end-time production execution means from among a plurality of types of end-time productions that can be executed in the end production period of the first advantageous state. Means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control, stick controller 31A, push button 31B. It may be another operation unit for setting. Step S752A in FIG. 9-19, step S784 in FIG. 9-20, and step S784 in FIG. 9-21. .) is further provided,)
The plurality of types of end-time effects include end-time effects that allow new selections instead of end-time effects that make it impossible to accept selections (for example, effect pattern E is effect pattern B or When the effect pattern C is not selectable, it is made selectable).

According to such a configuration, a variety of effects are produced, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of delay.

(1-9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1-1-1) to (1-8) above,
(The end time effect executing means can execute any one of a plurality of types of end time effects (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E) in the end effect time period of the first advantageous state, )
(End-time production reception that receives from the player a selection of an end-time production executed by the end-time production execution means from among a plurality of types of end-time productions that can be executed in the end production period of the first advantageous state. Means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control, stick controller 31A, push button 31B. It may be another operation unit for setting. Step S752A in FIG. 9-19, step S784 in FIG. 9-20, and step S784 in FIG. 9-21. .) is further provided,)
It is possible to accept the selection of a plurality of types of end effects, based on the fact that a release condition (for example, a condition that another effect pattern cannot be selected, a condition that a continuous change has been completed) is satisfied. Includes end effects. It should be noted that before or during the selection period in which the selection of the end effect can be accepted is started or during the selection period, the player performs a special operation (for example, a back button operation or command input, specifically, a cross). The release condition may be established according to the operation of the keys in a predetermined order, the continuous push of the push button, the input of the password, etc.).

According to such a configuration, a variety of effects are produced, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of delay.

(1-10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1-1-1) to (1-9) above,
(The end effect production means can execute any of a plurality of types of end effects (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E).)
Further comprising setting means (for example, refer to FIG. 10-1 to FIG. 12-3) capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player,
The plurality of types of end-time effects include effects that suggest the set value set by the setting means (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-26(H), the effect pattern C suggests a set value). It is a production.)

According to such a configuration, a variety of effects are produced, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of delay.

(1-11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1-1-1) to (1-10) above,
(The end effect production means can execute any of a plurality of types of end effects (for example, effect pattern A to effect pattern E).)
The plurality of types of end effects include end effects having different lengths (for example, effect patterns A to effect patterns E have different lengths),
After the execution of the end production is completed, the next variable is changed so that the period from the execution of the end production by the end production execution means to the start of the next variable display is the same. The period adjustment effect until the display is started is executed (for example, the ending effect period is longer than the effect patterns A to E, and the jackpot symbol is displayed in the extra time).

According to such a configuration, it is not necessary to adjust the period from the start of execution of the ending effect to the start of the next variable display, and the game control can be easily executed.

(1-12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1-1-1) to (1-11) above,
The ending production period includes at least a first period and a second period after the first period has elapsed,
In the first period, a related effect (for example, introduction effect, explanation effect, effect mode selection effect) related to the effect executed in the second period is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-27, ending. An effect pattern selection period for selecting an effect pattern to be executed thereafter may be provided during the effect time.)

According to such a configuration, a variety of effects are produced, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of delay.

(2-1-1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
As the advantageous state, at least a first advantageous state (for example, 16 round jackpot, probability variation jackpot) and a second advantageous state (eg, 6 round jackpot, normal jackpot) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. A game state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled by any of the above,
In the first advantageous state, at the time of starting the effect state at the start of the advantageous state, the start effect selecting unit (at a higher rate) selects a long period as a start effect period (for example, fanfare effect time) at the start of the advantageous state ( For example, the game control microcomputer 100, step S269 of FIG. 9-6, FIG. 9-7),
In a notification period (for example, a notification effect period) that is a part of the start effect period, a plurality of types of advantageous state intermediate effects that can be executed during the advantageous state after the start effect period ends. Of these, notification effect executing means (for example, effect control CPU 120, step 069FS122 of FIG. 9-16) capable of executing notification effect for informing the type of effectable effect during the advantageous state,
It is an advantage state effect reception means (for example, effect control CPU 120, stick controller 31A, push button 31B. Other operation unit for setting, which is capable of accepting the selection of the effect state in the advantageous state from a plurality of types from the player. 9-16, step 069FS123 to step 069FS126.),
The notification period in the first advantageous state is longer than the notification period in the second advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-17, the 16R certainty variation big hit is more informative than the 6R certainty variation big hit. For a long time),
The notification effect executing means,
In the notification period of the second advantageous state, the player notifies the type of the effect during the advantageous state that can be executed after the end of the start-time effect period in a manner that the player cannot select (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-17). In the case of 6R normal big hit, and in the case of promotion from 6R normal big hit to 6R probability variation big hit, the notification effect is executed in a mode that the player cannot select.),
In the notification period of the first advantageous state, the player notifies in a manner that the player can select which of the advantageous state productions should be executed after the end of the start production period (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-17). In the case of the 6R certainty variation big hit and the 16R certainty variation big hit, the notification effect for notifying the selected song is executed by the selection of which big hit song to output. ).

With such a configuration, the period in which the advantageous state is controlled can be lengthened, so that the gaming value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. Further, when the notification period is long, the player can select the effect during the advantageous state. For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of extension due to a longer period at the start of the advantageous state.

(2-1-2) It is possible to control to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state), and after the advantageous state ends, a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a probable variation state, a time saving state, a high state). A gaming machine that can be controlled to a base state (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
Normal state (for example, normal state), the special state, the advantageous state, a first advantageous state (for example, 16 round big hit, probability variation big hit), and a second disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. A game state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling at least one of an advantageous state (for example, 6 rounds of big hits, a normal big hit),
The case where the advantageous state is controlled when the special state is controlled, rather than the case where the advantageous state is controlled when the normal state is controlled (for example, a so-called first hit big hit) (For example, in the case of a so-called consecutive jackpot), a start effect selecting unit (for example, a start effect selecting unit that selects a long period as a start effect period (for example, fanfare effect time) at the start of the advantageous state at a high rate (for example, The game control microcomputer 100, step S269 in FIG. 9-6, and FIG. 9-7),
In a notification period (for example, a notification effect period) that is a part of the start effect period, a plurality of types of advantageous state intermediate effects that can be executed during the advantageous state after the start effect period ends. Of these, notification effect executing means (for example, effect control CPU 120, step 069FS122 of FIG. 9-16) capable of executing notification effect for informing the type of effectable effect during the advantageous state,
It is an advantage state effect reception means (for example, effect control CPU 120, stick controller 31A, push button 31B. Other operation unit for setting, which is capable of accepting the selection of the effect state in the advantageous state from a plurality of types from the player. 9-16, step 069FS123 to step 069FS126.),
The notification period in the first advantageous state is longer than the notification period in the second advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-17, the 16R certainty variation big hit is more informative than the 6R certainty variation big hit. For a long time),
The notification effect executing means,
In the notification period of the second advantageous state, the player notifies the type of the effect during the advantageous state that can be executed after the end of the start-time effect period in a manner that the player cannot select (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-17). In the case of 6R normal big hit, and in the case of promotion from 6R normal big hit to 6R probability variation big hit, the notification effect is executed in a mode that the player cannot select.),
In the notification period of the first advantageous state, the player notifies in a manner that the player can select which of the advantageous state productions should be executed after the end of the start production period (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-17). In the case of the 6R certainty variation big hit and the 16R certainty variation big hit, the notification effect for notifying the selected song is executed by the selection of which big hit song to output. ).

With such a configuration, the period in which the advantageous state is controlled can be lengthened, so that the gaming value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. Further, when the notification period is long, the player can select the effect during the advantageous state. For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of extension due to a longer period at the start of the advantageous state.

(2-1-3) First special identification information (for example, first special symbol) as special identification information (for example, special symbol) and second special identification information that is more advantageous to the player than the first special identification information ( For example, it is possible to execute a variable display of the second special symbol), it is possible to control an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state), and a special state different from the advantageous state after the end of the advantageous state ( For example, a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in a probability changing state, a time saving state, a high base state,
First reserved storage means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, RAM 102) capable of storing information regarding variable display of the first special identification information as first reserved storage information (for example, first reserved storage);
Second reserved storage means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, RAM 102) capable of storing information regarding variable display of the second special identification information as second reserved storage information (for example, second reserved storage),
When the first reserved storage information and the second reserved storage information are both stored, the variable display of the second special identification information based on the second reserved storage information is changed to the variable display of the first special identification information. Variable display control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, see FIG. 9-4) to be executed with priority over the display,
As the advantageous state, at least a first advantageous state (for example, 16 round jackpot, probability variation jackpot) and a second advantageous state (eg, 6 round jackpot, normal jackpot) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. A game state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled by any of the above,
The advantageous state is controlled when the advantageous state is controlled as a result of the variable display of the second suspended storage information, rather than when the advantageous state is controlled as a result of the variable display of the first suspended storage information. Start production selection means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, step S269 in FIG. 9-6, FIG. 9-) that selects a long period at a high rate as a start production period (for example, fanfare production time) at the start of 7),
In a notification period (for example, a notification effect period) that is a part of the start effect period, a plurality of types of advantageous state intermediate effects that can be executed during the advantageous state after the start effect period ends. Of these, notification effect executing means (for example, effect control CPU 120, step 069FS122 of FIG. 9-16) capable of executing notification effect for informing the type of effectable effect during the advantageous state,
It is an advantage state effect reception means (for example, effect control CPU 120, stick controller 31A, push button 31B. Other operation unit for setting, which is capable of accepting the selection of the effect state in the advantageous state from a plurality of types from the player. 9-16, step 069FS123 to step 069FS126.),
The notification period in the first advantageous state is longer than the notification period in the second advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-17, the 16R certainty variation big hit is more informative than the 6R certainty variation big hit. For a long time),
The notification effect executing means,
In the notification period of the second advantageous state, the player notifies the type of the effect during the advantageous state that can be executed after the end of the start-time effect period in a manner that the player cannot select (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-17). In the case of 6R normal big hit, and in the case of promotion from 6R normal big hit to 6R probability variation big hit, the notification effect is executed in a mode that the player cannot select.),
In the notification period of the first advantageous state, the player notifies in a manner that the player can select which of the advantageous state productions should be executed after the end of the start production period (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-17). In the case of the 6R certainty variation big hit and the 16R certainty variation big hit, the notification effect for notifying the selected song is executed by the selection of which big hit song to output. ).

With such a configuration, the period in which the advantageous state is controlled can be lengthened, so that the gaming value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. Further, when the notification period is long, the player can select the effect during the advantageous state. For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of extension due to a longer period at the start of the advantageous state.

(2-2-1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
As the advantageous state, at least a first advantageous state (for example, 16 round jackpot, probability variation jackpot) and a second advantageous state (eg, 6 round jackpot, normal jackpot) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. A game state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled by any of the above,
In the first advantageous state, at the time of starting the effect state at the start of the advantageous state, the start effect selecting unit (at a higher rate) selects a long period as a start effect period (for example, fanfare effect time) at the start of the advantageous state ( For example, the game control microcomputer 100, step S269 of FIG. 9-6, FIG. 9-7),
In a notification period (for example, a notification effect period) that is a part of the start effect period, a plurality of types of advantageous state intermediate effects that can be executed during the advantageous state after the start effect period ends. Of these, notification effect executing means (for example, effect control CPU 120, step 069FS122 of FIG. 9-16) capable of executing notification effect for informing the type of effectable effect during the advantageous state,
It is an advantage state effect reception means (for example, effect control CPU 120, stick controller 31A, push button 31B. Other operation unit for setting, which is capable of accepting the selection of the effect state in the advantageous state from a plurality of types from the player. 9-16, step 069FS123 to step 069FS126.),
The notification period of the first advantageous state is longer than the notification period of the second advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-17, the 16R certainty variation big hit is more informative than the 6R certainty variation big hit. Is a long period of time).

With such a configuration, the period in which the advantageous state is controlled can be lengthened, so that the gaming value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. Further, when the notification period is long, the player can select the effect during the advantageous state. For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of extension due to a longer period at the start of the advantageous state.

(2-2-2) It is possible to control to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state), and after the advantageous state ends, a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, probability variation state, time saving state, high state). A gaming machine that can be controlled to a base state (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
Normal state (for example, normal state), the special state, the advantageous state, a first advantageous state (for example, 16 round big hit, probability variation big hit), and a second disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. A game state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling at least one of an advantageous state (for example, 6 rounds of big hits, a normal big hit),
The case where the advantageous state is controlled when the special state is controlled, rather than the case where the advantageous state is controlled when the normal state is controlled (for example, a so-called first hit big hit) (For example, in the case of a so-called consecutive jackpot), a start effect selecting unit (for example, a start effect selecting unit that selects a long period as a start effect period (for example, fanfare effect time) at the start of the advantageous state at a high rate (for example, The game control microcomputer 100, step S269 in FIG. 9-6, and FIG. 9-7),
In a notification period (for example, a notification effect period) that is a part of the start effect period, a plurality of types of advantageous state intermediate effects that can be executed during the advantageous state after the start effect period ends. Of these, notification effect executing means (for example, effect control CPU 120, step 069FS122 of FIG. 9-16) capable of executing notification effect for informing the type of effectable effect during the advantageous state,
It is an advantage state effect reception means (for example, effect control CPU 120, stick controller 31A, push button 31B. Other operation unit for setting, which is capable of accepting the selection of the effect state in the advantageous state from a plurality of types from the player. 9-16, step 069FS123 to step 069FS126.),
The notification period of the first advantageous state is longer than the notification period of the second advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-17, the 16R certainty variation big hit is more informative than the 6R certainty variation big hit. Is a long period of time).

With such a configuration, the period in which the advantageous state is controlled can be lengthened, so that the gaming value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. Further, when the notification period is long, the player can select the effect during the advantageous state. For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of extension due to a longer period at the start of the advantageous state.

(2-2-3) First special identification information (for example, first special symbol) as special identification information (for example, special symbol) and second special identification information that is more advantageous to the player than the first special identification information ( For example, it is possible to execute a variable display of the second special symbol), it is possible to control an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state), and a special state different from the advantageous state after the end of the advantageous state ( For example, a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in a probability changing state, a time saving state, a high base state,
First reserved storage means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, RAM 102) capable of storing information regarding variable display of the first special identification information as first reserved storage information (for example, first reserved storage);
Second reserved storage means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, RAM 102) capable of storing information regarding variable display of the second special identification information as second reserved storage information (for example, second reserved storage),
When the first reserved storage information and the second reserved storage information are both stored, the variable display of the second special identification information based on the second reserved storage information is changed to the variable display of the first special identification information. Variable display control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, see FIG. 9-4) to be executed with priority over the display,
As the advantageous state, at least a first advantageous state (for example, 16 round jackpot, probability variation jackpot) and a second advantageous state (eg, 6 round jackpot, normal jackpot) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. A game state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled by any of the above,
The advantageous state is controlled when the advantageous state is controlled as a result of the variable display of the second suspended storage information, rather than when the advantageous state is controlled as a result of the variable display of the first suspended storage information. Start production selection means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, step S269 in FIG. 9-6, FIG. 9-) that selects a long period at a high rate as a start production period (for example, fanfare production time) at the start of 7),
In a notification period (for example, a notification effect period) that is a part of the start effect period, a plurality of types of advantageous state intermediate effects that can be executed during the advantageous state after the start effect period ends. Of these, notification effect executing means (for example, effect control CPU 120, step 069FS122 of FIG. 9-16) capable of executing notification effect for informing the type of effectable effect during the advantageous state,
It is an advantage state effect reception means (for example, effect control CPU 120, stick controller 31A, push button 31B. Other operation unit for setting, which is capable of accepting the selection of the effect state in the advantageous state from a plurality of types from the player. 9-16, step 069FS123 to step 069FS126.),
The notification period of the first advantageous state is longer than the notification period of the second advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-17, the 16R certainty variation big hit is more informative than the 6R certainty variation big hit. Is a long period of time).

With such a configuration, the period in which the advantageous state is controlled can be lengthened, so that the gaming value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. Further, when the notification period is long, the player can select the effect during the advantageous state. For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of extension due to a longer period at the start of the advantageous state.

(2-4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2-1-1) to (2-2-3) above,
The first advantageous state has a larger number of types of effects during the advantageous state that can be executed than the second advantageous state (for example, in the 6R normal big hit, it is possible to output the song at the time of the big hit from three songs And, in the 16R probability variation jackpot, you can select the song at the time of jackpot from 10 songs).

With such a configuration, the period in which the advantageous state is controlled can be lengthened, so that the gaming value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. Further, when the notification period is long, the player can select the effect during the advantageous state. For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of extension due to a longer period at the start of the advantageous state.

(2-5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2-1-1) to (2-4) above,
In the first advantageous state, based on the increase in the number of times that the advantageous state is continuously controlled (for example, the so-called consecutive chan number) while being controlled to the special state, in the first advantageous state, by the advantageous state effect reception means. There are many types of effects during the advantageous state that can accept the selection (for example, selectable jackpot songs are added to each consecutive chan).

With such a configuration, the period in which the advantageous state is controlled can be lengthened, so that the gaming value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. Further, when the notification period is long, the player can select the effect during the advantageous state. For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of extension due to a longer period at the start of the advantageous state.

(2-6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2-1-1) to (2-5) above,
As the first advantageous state, there are a 1A advantageous state (for example, 16 round certainty variation big hit) and a 1B advantageous state (eg, 6 round certainty variation big hit) which is more disadvantageous to the player than the 1A advantageous state,
The notification period of the 1A advantageous state is longer than the notification period of the 1B advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-17, the 16R probability variation big hit is more informative than the 6R probability variation big hit. The period is long.).

With such a configuration, the period in which the advantageous state is controlled can be lengthened, so that the gaming value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. Further, when the notification period is long, the player can select the effect during the advantageous state. For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of extension due to a longer period at the start of the advantageous state.

(2-7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2-1-1) to (2-6) above,
The notification effect execution means, as the notification effect,
In the second advantageous state, as the effect during the advantageous state, the type of effect for informing whether or not the advantageous state is advantageous is notified (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-17, a big hit type). The notification effect and round promotion effect are executed as the notification effect.) On the other hand,
In the first advantageous state, the notification of the type of music that can be output as the effect during the advantageous state is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-17, the music selection effect is executed as the notification effect).

With such a configuration, the period in which the advantageous state is controlled can be lengthened, so that the gaming value given to the player per unit period in the advantageous state can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. Further, when the notification period is long, the player can select the effect during the advantageous state. For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have a feeling of extension due to a longer period at the start of the advantageous state.

(2-8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2-1-1) to (2-7) above,
The start time effect period includes an advantageous state type suggestion period (for example, a jackpot type suggestion display period shown in FIG. 9-17) for executing an effect suggesting the type of the advantageous state,
The advantageous state type suggestion period of the first advantageous state is longer than the advantageous state type suggestion period of the second advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-17, 16R probability variation big hit, Bigger jackpot type suggestion period is longer than other big jackpots.)

With such a configuration, the player is informed of the advantageous state that is more advantageous for the player for a longer period. Therefore, the player can be pleased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modifications regarding settings]
The characteristic unit 207SG shown below is configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting operation, and it is possible to execute control in an advantageous state based on the set setting value. The configuration related to the configuration can be applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, problems may occur from the following viewpoints. BACKGROUND ART Conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a set value changing function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902, the fact that the setting state is set is informed only on the liquid crystal screen, so that it is not possible to appropriately inform the setting state. There was a problem. A gaming machine according to invention 207SG that solves such a problem is proposed below. Further, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that it is not possible to appropriately leave the occurrence of a predetermined error in the setting state. A gaming machine according to the invention 208SG that solves such a problem is proposed below. Furthermore, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine provided with an information display means capable of displaying predetermined information relating to a given gaming value, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent No. 6209653. However, when the information display means described in Japanese Patent No. 6209653 is applied to the pachinko gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, a display unit for confirming the set value and an information display unit are provided. However, there is a problem that the cost of the gaming machine cannot be reduced if each is separately provided. A gaming machine according to the invention 209SG which solves such a problem is proposed below. In the following, the features of the gaming machines according to the invention 207SG, the invention 208SG, and the invention 209SG will be represented as a characteristic portion 207SG. The characteristic part 207SG is applicable to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured to change the jackpot winning probability according to the set value by a setting change operation by a person on the game hall side (a clerk at the game hall, etc.) using operation means such as a predetermined switch. .. For example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a setting change process is executed which allows the jackpot winning probability set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 to be changed in response to a setting change operation. Thereby, in the special symbol normal process of the special symbol process process, by using the display result determination table according to the set value, the setting change process that allows the jackpot winning probability to be changed is executed. The set value is composed of, for example, 6 stages (a plurality of stages) of 1 to 6, and the winning probability of the jackpot is the winning probability in the order of the set value 1<the set value 2<the set value 3<the set value 4<the set value 5<the set value 6. Get higher That is, when the set value 1 is set as the set value, the advantage is the lowest for the player, and the advantage gradually increases in the order of the set value 2 to the set value 6. It should be noted that the set value is not limited to six levels as long as it has a plurality of levels. In this way, the rate of ball output (number of balls per unit time (number of prize balls)) changes according to the fact that the winning probability of the big hit can be changed, so changing the set value changes the ball output rate. It can be said that

For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the jackpot winning probability changes according to the selection of the set value by the setting changing operation at the time of turning on the power. Of the six setting values, for example, the setting value 4, the setting value 5, and the setting value 6 are called high setting, which has a high probability of winning the big hit. For example, the setting value 1, the setting value 2, and the setting value 3 are the big hit values. It is sometimes called a low setting with a low winning probability.

Also, the winning probability of the small hit may be changeable by setting the set value 1 to the set value 6, like the winning probability of the big hit. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which the probability variation control is executed, when changing the setting of the jackpot winning probability, both the jackpot winning probability in the low probability state and the jackpot winning probability in the high probability state are set. The values 1 to 6 may be changed (for example, both jackpot winning probabilities may be set value 1<set value 2<set value 3<set value 4<set value 5<set value 6). ..

Also, the selection probability of the type of jackpot may be changeable by setting the setting values 1 to 6 like the winning probability of the jackpot. The selection probability of the variation pattern type may also be changeable by setting the setting values 1 to 6 like the winning probability of the big hit. The selection probability of the variation pattern may also be changeable by setting the setting values 1 to 6 like the winning probability of the big hit.

FIG. 10-1 is a flowchart showing the setting value change processing (207SGSa013b) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control main processing. In the setting value changing process, the CPU 103 first starts the lighting of all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device (207SGSa051), the right-handed lamp and the first hold indicator, the second The hold indicator starts blinking (207SGSa052). Further, the CPU 103 starts the lighting of only one of the segments constituting the round display as a mode (a mode that is neither big hit A, big hit B nor big hit C) according to the setting value change processing (207SGSa052a). ).

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value change start notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa053), and determines whether or not any value 1 to 6 is stored as the setting value in the RAM 102 (207SGSa053a). ). When a value other than 1 to 6 is stored as the set value in the RAM 102, or when the set value is not stored in the RAM 102 (when the set value is cleared in 207SGSa020), the set value in the RAM 102 is “1”. Is set (the set value is reset to "1"), and the process proceeds to 207SGSa054 (207SGSa053b). If any one of the values 1 to 6 is stored in the RAM 102 (207SGSa053a; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGSa054 without executing the process of 207SGSa053b.

In 207SGSa054, the CPU 103 sets a power cut detection process execution start waiting timer for waiting until the power cut detection process is executed. Then, the value of the power cut detection process execution start wait timer is decremented by 1 (207SGSa055), and it is determined whether the power cut detection process execution start wait timer has timed out (207SGSa056). If the power-off detection process execution start waiting timer has not timed out (207SGSa056; N), the processes of 207SGSa055 and 207SGSa056 are repeatedly executed, and if the timer has expired (207SGSa056; Y), the power-off detection process is executed. (207 SGSa057).

After the power-off detection processing is executed, the CPU 103 starts displaying the set value stored in the RAM 102 on the display monitor (207SGSa058), and manages the game hall through a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a computer (207SGSa059).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the setting value changing flag (207SGSa061) and determines whether or not the setting switch has been operated (207SGSa062). When the setting change switch is not operated (207SGSa062; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa065, and when it is (207SGSa062; Y), the contents of the RAM 102 are updated based on the operation of the setting change switch (207SGSa063).

Specifically, when the set value displayed on the display monitor is "1", the RAM 102 is set to "2", which is a set value that is one step more advantageous to the player than "1", as a temporary set value. If the set value stored in the display monitor is “2”, the set value “3”, which is one step more advantageous to the player than “2”, is stored in the RAM 102 as a temporary set value. For example, a value larger than the set value displayed on the display monitor is stored in the RAM 102 as a borrowing setting. When the set value displayed on the display monitor is "6", "1" may be stored in the RAM 102 as a temporary set value.

Then, the CPU 103 displays the setting value (temporary setting value) stored in the RAM 102 on the display monitor (207SGSa064) and determines whether the lock switch is ON (207SGSa065).

When the lock switch is ON (207SGSa065; Y), the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processing of 207SGSa062 to 207SGSa065 to store a new temporary setting value in the RAM 102, or the setting value stored in the RAM 102. Execute the processing to display on the display monitor.

When the lock switch is OFF in 207SGSa065 (207SGSa065; N), the CPU 103 clears the setting value changing flag (207SGSa066) and ends the display of the setting value (or the provisional setting value) on the display monitor. However, (207SGSa067), all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device are turned off (207SGSa067a). Further, the CPU 103 ends the blinking of the right-handed lamp, the first hold indicator and the second hold indicator, and the lighting of the segments forming the round indicator (207SGSa068, 207SGSa068a).

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether a temporary setting value is stored in the RAM 102 (207SGSa069). If the temporary setting value is not stored in the RAM 102 (207SGSa069;N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa072, and if it is stored (207SGSa069;Y), the value of the setting value further stored in the RAM 102 and the RAM 102 are stored. It is determined whether or not the value of the provisional set value is different (207SGSa070).

When the value of the set value stored in the RAM 102 is the same as the value of the temporary set value stored in the RAM 102 (207SGSa070; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa072, and when they are different (207SGSa070; Y), The temporary setting value stored in the RAM 102 is stored in the RAM 102 as the setting value (207SGSa071), and the process proceeds to 207SGSa072. That is, in the process of 207SGSa071, the temporary setting value is updated and stored in the RAM 102 as the actual setting value.

Moreover, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value change end notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa073), and ends the setting value change processing.

FIG. 10-2 is a flowchart showing a set value confirmation process (207SGSa013c) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control main process. In the set value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first starts the lighting of all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device (207SGSa101), the right-handed lamp and the first hold indicator, the second The hold indicator starts blinking (207SGSa102). Further, the CPU 103 starts the lighting of only one of the segments constituting the round indicator as a mode (a mode that is neither big hit A, big hit B nor big hit C) according to the set value confirmation processing (207SGSa103). ).

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a set value confirmation start notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa104), and sets a power cut detection process execution start waiting timer for waiting until the power cut detection process is executed (207SGSa105). ). Then, the value of the power cut detection process execution start wait timer is decremented by 1 (207SGSa106), and it is determined whether the power cut detection process execution start wait timer has timed out (207SGSa107). If the power-off detection process execution start waiting timer is not timed out (207SGSa107; N), the processes of 207SGSa106 and 207SGSa107 are repeatedly executed, and if the timer is out (207SGSa107; Y), the power-off detection process is executed. (207SGSa108). The power-off detection process (207SGSa108) is the same as the power-off detection process (207SGSa057) of the setting value changing process described above.

After the power-off detection process is executed, the CPU 103 starts displaying the set value stored in the RAM 102 on the display monitor (207SGSa109), and manages the game hall through a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a computer (207SGSa110).

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the lock switch is ON (207SGSa111). When the lock switch is ON (207SGSa111; Y), the CPU 103 waits until the lock switch is turned OFF by repeatedly executing the process of 207SGSa111. When the lock switch is OFF in 207SGSa111 (207SGSa111; N), the display of the set value on the display monitor is ended (207SGSa112), and all the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device are configured. The segment is turned off (207SGSa112a). Further, the CPU 103 ends the blinking of the right-handed lamp, the first hold indicator, and the second hold indicator and the lighting of the segments forming the round indicator (207SGSa113, 207SGSa114).

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value confirmation end notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa115), and ends the setting value confirmation processing.

In this way, the lighting of the first special symbol display device, the second special symbol display device and the round display from the start of the set value change process and the set value confirmation process, and the first hold display device, the second hold display device and By starting the blinking of the right-handed lamp, the player, the clerk of the game hall, or the like is that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the process of changing or confirming the set value from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Can be recognized.

In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, at the start of the set value changing process or the set value confirming process, one of the segments constituting the round indicator is set as a mode corresponding to the set value changing process or the set value confirming process. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lighting pattern of the segments forming the round display can be any of the big hit A, big hit B, and big hit C. The lighting mode is not particularly limited as long as it is not applicable.

Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, when the setting value changing process and the setting value confirming process are started, the segments constituting the round indicator are in the same form as the mode corresponding to the setting value changing process and the setting value confirming process. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the segments that make up the round display can be set at the start of the set value change process and at the start of the set value confirmation process. You may light in different modes.

As described above, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once turned off (power cut) and then restarted, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cleared with the lock switch while the gaming machine frame is open. The setting value changing process is executed by turning on the switch.

At this time, in the display monitor, the display (base value display) using the first display unit, the second display unit, the third display unit, and the fourth display unit is terminated by turning off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1. To do. That is, the display monitor according to the present embodiment uses different numbers of display units when the setting value changing process is executed at the time of startup and when the base value is displayed after the startup is completed.

Next, when the CPU 103 starts the setting value changing process by restarting the pachinko gaming machine 1, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed on the fourth display unit. Then, when the setting changeover switch is operated while the set value is being displayed on the fourth display unit in this way, the display on the fourth display unit is updated. When the lock switch is turned off in this state, the numerical value displayed on the fourth display unit is set as a new set value.

Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once turned off (power cut) and then restarted, the lock switch is turned on (cleared) while the gaming machine frame is open. By setting the switch to OFF), the set value confirmation processing is executed.

At this time, in the display monitor, the display (base value display) using the first display unit, the second display unit, the third display unit, and the fourth display unit is terminated by turning off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1. To do. That is, the display monitor according to the present embodiment uses different numbers of display units when the set value confirmation process is executed at the time of startup and when the base value is displayed after the startup is completed.

Next, when the CPU 103 starts the set value confirmation process by restarting the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started on the fourth display unit. The display of the set value on the fourth display unit is ended when the lock switch is turned off, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is ready to play.

The invention 207SG has been described above by exemplifying the characteristic portion 207SG. That is, the gaming machine according to Invention 207SG,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 10A) capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as the setting value); ,
With game control means capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the setting value set by the setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing),
Equipped with
An information display unit (for example, a game information display unit) including a variable display unit (for example, a first special symbol display device and a second special symbol display device) that is controlled by the game control means and can perform at least variable display. Have
A setting state in which the setting value can be set by the setting means when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the clear switch, the lock switch, and the open sensor are ON at the time of starting the pachinko gaming machine 1) (for example, a setting state). , The state in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting value changing process shown in FIG.
When in the setting state, the information display unit displays a display that can be recognized as being in the setting state (for example, when the CPU 103 is in the process of changing the setting value, the first special symbol display device and the first special symbol display device). 2 special symbol display device, a portion that lights up all the segments that make up) is described, and according to this feature, variable display that is an important display in the gaming machine is executed. Since the fact that the setting state is set is notified on the display unit, it is possible to perform suitable notification.

Further, the invention 208SG has been described by exemplifying the characteristic portion 207SG. That is, the gaming machine according to Invention 208SG,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 10A) capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as the setting value); ,
With game control means capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the setting value set by the setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing),
Equipped with
An information display unit (for example, a game information display unit) including a variable display unit (for example, a first special symbol display device and a second special symbol display device) that is controlled by the game control means and can perform at least variable display. Have
A setting state in which the setting value can be set by the setting means when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the clear switch, the lock switch, and the open sensor are ON at the time of starting the pachinko gaming machine 1) (for example, a setting state). , The state in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting value changing process shown in FIG.
When the specific condition is satisfied but a predetermined error occurs, a display capable of specifying that the predetermined error has occurred is displayed in the variable display area (for example, when an error more than a set value occurs, A game machine characterized by flashing all segments composing the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device) is described, and according to this feature, an important display in the game machine In the variable display area where the variable display is executed, the display notifies that a predetermined error has occurred even if the specific condition is satisfied. It can be suitably performed.

Further, the invention 209SG has been described by exemplifying the characteristic portion 207SG. That is, the gaming machine according to Invention 209SG,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a game medium and capable of being controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 10A) capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as the setting value); ,
With game control means capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the setting value set by the setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing),
A game value giving means for giving a game value based on a game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a game ball wins a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a general winning opening 10, a large winning opening, etc. The part where prize balls are paid out by doing),
An information display unit (for example, a first display unit to a fourth display unit) capable of displaying predetermined information (for example, a base value) about the game value given by the game value giving unit (for example, a first display unit to a fourth display unit). , Display monitor)
Equipped with
The information display means is capable of displaying setting value information capable of specifying the setting value set by the setting means when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. X, the pachinko gaming machine 1 If the lock switch and the open sensor are ON and the clear switch is OFF when activating, the set value can be displayed in the set value confirmation state),
The number of the display units used is different when the predetermined information is displayed and when the setting value information is displayed (for example, when the base value is displayed on the display monitor, the first display unit is displayed). , A second display unit, a third display unit, a fourth display unit is used, and when the set value is displayed on the display monitor, only the fourth display unit is used) According to this feature, since the set value information is also displayed on the information display means capable of displaying the predetermined information regarding the game value, it is not necessary to separately provide a display means for displaying the set value information, and the game is played. Machine cost can be reduced.

The characteristic part 207SG in the present embodiment has been described above with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to these examples, and even if there are changes and additions without departing from the scope of the present invention, Included in the invention.

For example, in the characteristic unit 207SG of the embodiment, the game information display unit, the first special symbol display device, the second special symbol display device, the first hold display device, the second hold display device, the normal symbol display device, the general Although the form composed of the figure hold indicator, the round indicator, the right-handed lamp, the probability variation lamp, and the time saving lamp has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game information display section displays the first special symbol. The device and the second special symbol display device may be included without including.

In the characteristic unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, the CPU 103 is executing the setting value changing process (setting value changing state) and the setting value checking process is being executed (setting value checking state). The 1 special symbol display device and the 2nd special symbol display device have been illustrated as being in the same mode, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the CPU 103 is executing the setting value changing process. With and when the set value confirmation process is being executed, the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device may be lit or blinked in different modes. By doing this, whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state depending on the lighting mode or blinking mode of the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device. Can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the embodiment, in the set value changing state and the set value confirming state, the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device are turned on to turn on the first special symbol display device. Illustrated a mode in which the display mode (lighting mode) of the symbol display device or the second special symbol display device is different from the display mode when the first special symbol display device or the second special symbol display device derives and displays the variable display result. However, the present invention is not limited to this, the display mode (lighting mode) of the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device in the setting value change state and the setting value confirmation state, the first special symbol If the display device or the second special symbol display device is different from the display mode when the variable display result is derived and displayed, a part of all the segments configuring the first special symbol display device or the second special symbol display device It is not necessary to turn on the segment.

Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the above-mentioned embodiment, in the setting value change state and the setting value confirmation state, all segments and round indicators constituting the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device are configured. The mode in which the segments are lit, the right-handed lamp, and all the segments composing the first hold indicator and the second hold indicator are blinked has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the set value is changed. In the state and the set value confirmation state, the lighting of one segment that constitutes the round display, the blinking of the right-handed lamp, and the blinking of all the segments that configure the first hold indicator and the second hold indicator are not executed. Or, you may execute only one part.

Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the above-described embodiment, in the set value changing state and the set value confirming state, only one of the segments constituting the round display is turned on, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is not limited to this, and if the combination does not correspond to the jackpot type, there may be a plurality of lit segments constituting the round indicator in the set value change state and the set value confirmation state.

Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the notification of the setting value abnormality error is executed using the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of this, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be individually provided with an LED for error notification, and the LED may be turned on or blinking to notify that the set value error has occurred.

Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which a display monitor for displaying the base value is displayed on the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited thereto. 1 may not be provided with a display monitor. If the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not provided with a display monitor as described above, a display means for displaying a set value (or a provisional set value) in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state may be newly provided.

Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the embodiment, the first special symbol display device, the second special symbol display device, the first hold display device, the second hold display device, the round display device, the right, which constitute the game information display portion. Although the striking lamp and the like are set to be different from those in the game, the pachinko gaming machine 1 notifies the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value changing state or the set value confirming state, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the first special symbol display device, the second special symbol display device, the first holding display device, the second holding display device, the round display device, the right striking lamp, etc., which constitute the game information display unit, are pachinko game machines 1 May be displayed (lighted or blinked) during the game as long as it is possible to inform that the set value is changed or the set value is confirmed.

Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the embodiment, the first special symbol display device, the second special symbol display device, the first hold display device, the second hold display device, the round display device, the right, which constitute the game information display portion. Although the striking lamp and the like are set to be different from those in the game, the pachinko gaming machine 1 notifies the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value changing state or the set value confirming state, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the “mode different from that during game” may include that the blinking cycle is different, the brightness, the emission color of each segment is different, and the like.

Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the embodiment, the first special symbol display device, the second special symbol display device, the first hold display device, the second hold display device, the round display device, the right, which constitute the game information display portion. Although the form which notifies that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value changing state or the set value confirming state by lighting or blinking the striking lamp has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. When 1 is the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state, the first special symbol display device, the second special symbol display device, the first hold indicator, the second hold indicator, the round indicator, the right-handed lamp lighting A description that flashing or blinking is executed may be provided at a predetermined location of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a position near the game information display unit). By doing so, the clerk of the game hall who is not familiar with the pachinko gaming machine 1, the first special symbol display device, the second special symbol display device, the first hold indicator, the second hold indicator, It is possible to prevent erroneous recognition of lighting or blinking of the round indicator and the right-handed lamp as a failure of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In the game control main process of the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment, the RAM clear process is executed when it is determined that the clear switch is ON or after the setting value changing flag is cleared. The present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear processing is performed when it is determined that the clear switch is ON or when the set value changing flag is cleared. It may be executed when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is set, not after.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 10F)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, problems may occur from the following viewpoints. Conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting change operation and that can execute control of an advantageous state advantageous to the player based on the set setting value. there were. In such a pachinko gaming machine, in the setting confirmation processing for confirming the set value, it is possible to shift to the next processing only when all the main processings being executed are completed (for example, JP 2010-200902A). reference). However, in the case of a gaming machine as disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, when it is desired to confirm the setting immediately, it is necessary to wait until all the processes being executed are completed, and the setting confirmation work is preferably executed. I couldn't. The gaming machines according to the invention 10F, the invention 11F, the invention 12F, and the invention 13F which solve such problems are proposed below. In the following, the features of the gaming machines according to Invention 10F, Invention 11F, Invention 12F, and Invention 13F will be referred to as characteristic unit 10F. The characteristic unit 10F is characterized in that a game stop start process and a game stop end process are added to the above-described set value change process and set value confirmation process. The characteristic unit 10F can be applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above together with the characteristic unit 207SG.

FIG. 11-1 is a flowchart showing the setting value changing process in the characteristic unit 10F. In FIG. 11A, the same processing as that in FIG. The RAM clearing process was executed before the setting change process was executed. Therefore, at the stage of the setting change process, no information about the game remains in the storage area. However, the RAM clear process may be executed when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is set. As a result, the RAM clear process is executed after the setting change process. In the characteristic unit 10F, description will be made on the assumption that the RAM clear process is executed after the setting change process. In the setting value change processing, the CPU 103 first executes the game stop start processing (10FS001). Details of the game stop start processing will be described with reference to FIG. 11-3. After the game stop start process, the lighting of all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device is started (207SGSa051). Then, the same processing as the processing shown in FIG.

In addition, the CPU 103 executes the game stop ending process after executing the process of clearing the setting value changing flag (207SGSa066) (10FS002). Details of the game stop ending process will be described with reference to FIG. 11-4. After the game stop ending process, the display of the set value (or the provisional set value) on the display monitor is ended (207SGSa067). Then, the same processing as the processing shown in FIG.

FIG. 11-2 is a flowchart showing the setting value confirmation processing in the characteristic unit 10F. In FIG. 11B, the same processes as those in FIG. In the set value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first executes a game stop start process (10FS001). Details of the game stop start processing will be described with reference to FIG. 11-3. This game stop start processing is common to the game stop start processing of FIG. 11-1. After the game stop start process, the lighting of all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device is started (207SGSa101). Then, the same processing as the processing shown in FIG. 10-2 is executed.

Further, when the lock switch is turned off in 207SGSa111 (207SGSa111; N), the CPU 103 executes the game stop ending process (10FS002). Details of the game stop ending process will be described with reference to FIG. 11-4. This game stop end process is the same process as the game stop end process of FIG. 11-1. After the game stop ending process, the display of the set value on the display monitor is ended (207SGSa112). Then, the same processing as the processing shown in FIG. 10-2 is executed.

(About various timers)
Next, the game stop start processing will be described. During the game, a plurality of timers measure time and period relating to the game. When the game is stopped, the CPU 103 stops the counting of these timers. The plurality of timers will be described in order. The attacker opening time timer is a timer for measuring the opening time of the special winning opening door of the special variable winning ball device 7 having the special winning opening. The CPU 103 uses an attacker opening time timer to measure the time from when the special winning opening door is opened to when it is closed. The inter-round interval period timer is a timer for measuring the interval period between rounds during the big hit game state. The CPU 103 uses the inter-round interval period timer to measure the time from the end of one round to the start of the next round.

The V-lid opening time timer controls the gaming state after the jackpot game is finished to a certain-variable state based on the passage of a certain switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7, and the certain switch ( It is a timer for measuring the opening time of the V lid, which is provided in front of a sensor for detecting the V probability change and is controlled to be in an open state and a closed state. In the V-probable variation gaming machine, the V lid is opened in a predetermined round of a plurality of rounds. An area in which the V lid is opened is called a V winning area. The CPU 103 measures the time from when the V lid is opened to when it is closed by the V lid opening time timer. The V passage waiting time timer is a timer for measuring the time of V winning which determines that a game ball passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is valid. The CPU 103 is a game ball that has passed through a predetermined switch after the special winning opening door of the special variable winning ball device 7 has changed from the open state to the closed state (the player enters the special winning opening near the closing of the special winning opening door and sets the predetermined prize). A game ball that has passed through the switch is also determined as a V winning within the valid period. The CPU 103 measures the valid period of the V winning, in which the V winning is determined to be valid, by the V passage waiting time timer.

The electric-chu open time timer is a timer for measuring the open time when the electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wings, which is the variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory), is controlled to be in the open state. .. The variable winning ball device 6B changes between a closed state and an open state, and the CPU 103 measures the time from when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state to when it is closed by the electric Chu opening time timer. ..

The special figure variation time timer is a timer for measuring the execution time of the variable display of the special symbol. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the variable display of the special symbol to the end of the variable display of the special symbol by the special symbol fluctuation time timer. The universal figure variation time timer is a timer for measuring the execution time of the variable display of the ordinary symbols. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the variable display of the normal symbol to the end of the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal variable time timer.

The fanfare time timer is a timer for measuring a period in which the fanfare effect is executed, which is a period for notifying that the big hit is controlled at the start of the big hit. The fanfare period is a period in which the fanfare production as a production operation for notifying the start of the big hit game state is executed after the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the fanfare effect to the end of the fanfare effect by the fanfare time timer.

The ending time timer is a timer for measuring a period during which the ending effect is executed, which is a period for notifying the end of the big hit when the big hit ends. The ending period is a period in which the big hit ending process is executed, and is a period in which an ending effect is executed as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the ending effect to the end of the ending effect by the ending time timer.

The CPU 103 includes a special figure fluctuation stop period timer, a general figure fluctuation stop period timer, and the like as timers other than the above timers. The special figure fluctuation stop period timer is a timer for measuring the time (for example, 0.5 seconds) from when the variable display of the special symbol is derived and displayed until the variable display of the next special symbol is started. The CPU 103 measures the time from when the variable display of the special symbol is derived and displayed by the special figure fluctuation stop period timer until the variable display of the next special symbol is started. The universal figure fluctuation stop period timer is a timer for measuring the time (for example, 0.4 seconds) from when the variable display of the normal symbol is derived and displayed until the next variable display of the normal symbol is started. The CPU 103 measures the time from when the variable display of the ordinary symbol is derived and displayed by the universal figure fluctuation stop period timer until the variable display of the next ordinary symbol is started.

(Game stop start processing)
Next, the game stop start processing in the characteristic unit 10F will be described. FIG. 11-3 is a flowchart showing the game stop start processing in the characteristic unit 10F. First, in the game stop start processing, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the attacker opening time timer is operating (10FS010). In 10FS010, if the attacker opening time timer is in operation (10FS010; Y), the attacker opening time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends. If the attacker release time timer is not in operation (10FS010; N), it is determined whether the inter-round interval period timer is in operation (10FS011). In 10FS011, if the inter-round interval period timer is in operation (10FS011; Y), the inter-round interval period timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends.

If the inter-round interval period timer is not operating (10FS011; N), it is determined whether the V-lid opening time timer is operating (10FS012). In 10FS012, if the V lid opening time timer is in operation (10FS012; Y), the V lid opening time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends. If the V lid opening time timer is not in operation (10FS012; N), it is determined whether or not the V passage waiting time timer is in operation (10FS013). In 10FS013, if the V passage waiting time timer is in operation (10FS013; Y), the operating V passage waiting time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process is ended.

If the V passage waiting time timer is not in operation (10FS013; N), it is determined whether or not the power-chu open time timer is in operation (10FS014). In 10FS014, if the power-chu open time timer is operating (10FS014; Y), the power-chu open time timer that is operating is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends. If the power switch opening time timer is not operating (10FS014; N), it is determined whether the special figure variation time timer is operating (10FS015). In 10FS015, if the special figure fluctuation time timer is in operation (10FS015; Y), the special figure fluctuation time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends.

If the special figure variation time timer is not in operation (10FS015; N), it is determined whether the general figure variation time timer is in operation (10FS016). In 10FS016, if the universal figure fluctuation time timer is operating (10FS016; Y), the universal figure fluctuation time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends. If the universal figure variation time timer is not operating (10FS016; N), it is determined whether the fanfare time timer is operating (10FS017). In 10FS017, if the fanfare time timer is in operation (10FS017; Y), the fanfare time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends.

If the fanfare time timer is not operating (10FS017; N), it is determined whether the ending time timer is operating (10FS018). In 10FS018, if the ending time timer is in operation (10FS018; Y), the ending time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends. If the ending time timer is not in operation (10FS018; N), it is determined whether or not a timer such as a special figure fluctuation stop period timer is in operation as another timer (10FS019). In 10FS019, if the other timer is in operation (10FS019; Y), the other timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends. If the other timers are not operating (10FS019; N), the other process (10FS021) is executed, and then the process ends.

Here, the other processing (10FS021) includes the following processing. For example, a process for invalidating the firing of the ball hitting handle 30, a process for invalidating various sensors provided at the starting opening, the general winning opening 10, the out opening, and the passage gate 41, a process for invalidating detection of various errors, The process of invalidating the payout of prize balls is included. By the other process (10FS021), various processes are invalidated and the game is not normally executed.

(Game stop end processing)
Next, the game stop ending process in the characteristic unit 10F will be described. FIG. 11-4 is a flowchart showing a game stop ending process in the characteristic unit 10F. First, in the game stop ending process, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the attacker opening time timer is stopped (10FS030). In 10FS030, if the attacker opening time timer is stopped (10FS030; Y), the stopped attacker opening time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends. If the attacker release time timer is not stopped (10FS030; N), it is determined whether the inter-round interval period timer is stopped (10FS031). In 10FS031, if the inter-round interval period timer is stopped (10FS031; Y), the stopped inter-round interval period timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends.

If the inter-round interval period timer is not stopped (10FS031; N), it is determined whether the V-lid opening time timer is stopped (10FS032). In 10FS032, if the V-lid opening time timer is stopped (10FS032; Y), the stopped V-lid opening time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends. If the V lid opening time timer is not stopped (10FS032; N), it is determined whether the V passage waiting time timer is stopped (10FS033). In 10FS033, if the V passage waiting time timer is stopped (10FS033; Y), the stopped V passage waiting time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends.

If the V passage waiting time timer is not stopped (10FS033; N), it is determined whether or not the power cable open time timer is stopped (10FS034). In 10FS034, if the power-chu open time timer is stopped (10FS034; Y), the active power-chu open time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends. If the electric channel open time timer is not stopped (10FS034; N), it is determined whether the special figure variation time timer is stopped (10FS035). In 10FS035, if the special figure variation time timer is stopped (10FS035; Y), the stopped special figure variation time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends.

If the special figure variation time timer is not stopped (10FS035; N), it is determined whether the universal figure variation time timer is stopped (10FS036). In 10FS036, if the universal figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS036; Y), the suspended universal figure fluctuation time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends. If the universal figure fluctuation time timer is not stopped (10FS036; N), it is determined whether the fanfare time timer is stopped (10FS037). In 10FS037, if the fanfare time timer is stopped (10FS037; Y), the stopped fanfare time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends.

If the fanfare time timer is not stopped (10FS037; N), it is determined whether the ending time timer is stopped (10FS038). In 10FS038, if the ending time timer is stopped (10FS038; Y), the stopped ending time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends. If the ending time timer is not stopped (10FS038; N), it is determined whether or not a timer such as a special figure fluctuation stop period timer is stopped as another timer (10FS039). In 10FS039, if the other timers are stopped (10FS039; Y), the stopped other timers are activated (10FS040), and the process ends. If the other timers are not stopped (10FS039; N), the other processing (10FS041) is executed, and then the processing ends.

Here, the other processing (10FS041) includes the following processing. For example, the process of enabling the firing of the ball hitting handle 30, the process of enabling various sensors provided in the starting port, the general winning opening 10, the out port, and the passage gate 41, the process of enabling the detection of various errors, It includes processing for enabling the payout of prize balls. By the other process (10FS041), various processes are validated and the game is normally executed.

(About the effect of the characteristic part)
As shown in FIG. 11-1 to FIG. 11-4, the CPU 103 controls the attacker opening time timer based on the fact that the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the setting confirmation state while changing to the open state. Of the attacker opening time timer is restarted based on the completion of the setting confirmation state. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the period during which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state in the setting confirmed state is subtracted to advance the game. Can be prevented from becoming a disadvantage.

As shown in FIGS. 11-1 to 11-4, the CPU 103 stops the time measurement of the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled in the inter-round interval period, and the setting confirmation state is Based on the end, the time measurement of the period of the inter-round interval period timer is restarted. By doing so, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting and prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the fact that the interval period between rounds is subtracted in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. You can

As shown in FIGS. 11-1 to 11-4, the CPU 103 stops the time measurement of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled during the valid period of V winning, and confirms the setting. Based on the end of the state, the measurement of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer is restarted. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is prevented from being disadvantaged due to the fact that the valid period of the V winning is subtracted in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. be able to.

As shown in FIG. 11-1 to FIG. 11-4, the CPU 103 is based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, and the valid period of the power-chu open time timer. And stops the time measurement of the valid period of the power cable open time timer based on the completion of the setting confirmation state. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the game progresses when the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is in the enterable state in the setting confirmed state. It is possible to prevent that.

As shown in FIGS. 11-1 to 11-4, the CPU 103 measures the effective period of the special figure variation time timer based on the fact that the special symbol variable display is controlled to the setting confirmation state while being executed. Is stopped, and the measurement of the valid period of the special figure variation time timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is prevented that the player is disadvantaged because the special symbol variable display is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. be able to.

As shown in FIG. 11-1 to FIG. 11-4, the CPU 103 measures the effective period of the general-use variable time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the ordinary symbols is executed. And restarts the measurement of the effective period of the universal figure variable time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state. By doing so, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting and prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the fact that the variable display of the normal symbols is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. be able to.

As shown in FIGS. 11-1 to 11-4, the CPU 103 stops counting the effective period of the fanfare time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled when the fanfare production is being executed, Based on the end of the setting confirmation state, the measurement of the effective period of the fanfare time timer is restarted. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the fanfare effect being executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progressing. ..

As shown in FIGS. 11-1 to 11-4, the CPU 103 stops the measurement of the valid period of the ending time timer based on the fact that the ending confirmation is controlled to the setting confirmation state while the ending effect is being executed. Based on the end of the setting confirmation state, the counting of the valid period of the ending time timer is restarted. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the ending effect being executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progressing. ..

As shown in FIGS. 11-1 to 11-4, the CPU 103 is controlled based on the fact that the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state after the variable display of the special symbol is stopped and before the next variable display is started. The clocking of the period of the fluctuation stop period timer is stopped, and the clocking of the period of the special figure fluctuation stop period timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state. By doing this, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the game proceeds by subtracting the period in which the next variable display is started after the variable display of the special symbol is stopped in the setting confirmation state. This can prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

(Regarding a modified example of the gaming machine related to the characteristic unit 10F)
Although the characteristic portion 10F has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and the present invention is not limited to modifications and additions without departing from the scope of the present invention. included. Below, the modification of the characteristic part 10F is demonstrated.

The game machine (so-called first-class game machine) that shifts to the big hit game state based on the variable display result of the special pattern and the decorative pattern has been described, but the special variable winning ball device (so-called accessory) provided in the game area A gaming machine (so-called second-class gaming machine) that shifts to a jackpot gaming state based on the fact that a game ball has won (V-winning) a special winning port (V winning port) inside, and the first and second types It may be applied to a game machine (one-two-mixer) in which and are combined. When the start winning to the second start winning opening is detected, the big hit determination is executed. When the result of the big hit is determined, the variable display of the second special figure is executed and the big hit display result becomes the big hit game. The game control similar to the jackpot based on the start winning to the first start winning opening, such as being controlled to the state, is executed. On the other hand, when the judgment result is not a big hit, the small hit judgment is executed, and when the judgment result is the small hit, the variable display of the second special figure is executed and the small hit display result becomes the small hit game. The special variable winning ball device for small hits is controlled to be open for a predetermined time. When the game ball is received by the special variable winning ball device for the small hit in the small hitting game state, and the game ball enters the special winning hole (V area) and is detected by the predetermined switch, the variable for the big hit The CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 executes the second-class big hit game control in which the prize winning ball device is opened for a predetermined number of rounds and becomes a big hit game state.

In such a one-and-two-mixer, a small hit time timer may be provided for measuring an effective period in which a game ball that has entered the special winning opening (V area) is determined to be effective. The CPU 103 determines that a game ball that has passed a predetermined switch after the special variable winning ball device has passed from the open state to the closed state by the small hit time timer is within the valid period. The CPU 103 uses a small hit time timer to measure a period during which the winning of the special winning opening is effectively determined. Then, the CPU 103 stops measuring the effective period of the small hit time timer based on being controlled to the setting check state when in the small hit game state, and based on the end of the setting check state. The counting of the effective period of the small hit time timer may be restarted. By doing this, it is possible to confirm the setting immediately, and it is possible for the player to be disadvantaged because the control is executed in the small hitting game state in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

In the above-described embodiment, various controls are executed in the setting confirmation state, but as shown in FIGS. 11-1 to 11-4, the same control may be executed in the setting change state. Good. For example, the CPU 103 stops clocking of various timers based on being controlled to a setting change state when the player is in an advantageous state, etc., and various timers based on the completion of the setting change state. You may make it restart the time measurement of.

The control of the timer may be changed depending on whether the variable display of the special symbol is the big hit display result or the off display result. Specifically, if the variable display of the special symbol is the big hit display result, stop the timekeeping of the special figure fluctuation time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state, and based on the fact that the setting confirmation state has ended. If the special display variable time timer is restarted and the variable display of the special symbol is displayed as a result, the special map variable time timer may not be stopped even if the setting confirmation state is controlled. .. In this way, for the big hit display result that is in an advantageous state for the player, the timer is stopped to give a disadvantage to the player, but the timer is stopped because the deviated display result does not cause a disadvantage to the player. You can prevent it from stopping. As a control method, it may be determined whether the current game state is a big hit display result or a deviant display result before the game stop start process accompanying the set value confirmation process is executed. Then, if the setting confirmation is executed during execution of the variable display of the deviation display result, during the execution of the variable display of the deviation display, it is the symbol stop period without stopping the timing of the special figure fluctuation time timer. At this time, the special figure fluctuation stop period timer may be stopped.

The timer control may be changed depending on whether the set value is advantageous to the player or not. For example, when the setting confirmation state is set when the setting value is advantageous to the player, various timers are stopped, but when the setting confirmation state is set when the setting value is unfavorable to the player, various timers are set. It may not be stopped.

The invention 10F has been described above by exemplifying the characteristic portion 10F. That is, the gaming machine according to Invention 10F,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
The setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process) that can set any one of the setting values (for example, the setting values 1 to 3) of a plurality of stages having different degrees of advantage for the player with the setting changing operation. Part to execute)
A state control means capable of controlling a setting confirmation state capable of confirming which setting value is set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting variable value confirmation processing);
A variable winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that changes between a first state (for example, an open state) that is advantageous for the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is disadvantageous for the player.
A predetermined game execution means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of executing a predetermined game (e.g., a round) for changing the variable winning device from the second state to the first state during the advantageous state a plurality of times;
And a variable winning timekeeping unit (for example, a CPU 103 which measures an attacker opening time timer) for measuring a period for changing the variable winning apparatus to the first state,
The variable winning timekeeping means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable winning device is changing to the first state, and the setting confirmation state has ended. Based on the fact that the CPU 103 restarts the timekeeping of the period (for example, the CPU 103 measures the period of the attacker opening time timer based on the fact that the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the setting confirmation state while changing to the open state). And restarting the time measurement of the attacker opening time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and in the setting confirmation state, the period during which the variable winning device is changed to the first state is subtracted and the game progresses, so that the player Can be prevented from becoming a disadvantage.

The invention 11F has been described by exemplifying the characteristic portion 10F. That is, the gaming machine according to Invention 11F,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
The setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process) that can set any one of the setting values (for example, the setting values 1 to 3) of a plurality of stages having different degrees of advantage for the player with the setting changing operation. Part to execute)
A state control means capable of controlling a setting confirmation state capable of confirming which setting value is set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting variable value confirmation processing);
Based on the fact that the game medium has entered the predetermined area (for example, the passage gate 41), the normal identification information (for example, the normal symbol) is variably displayed, and the normal variable display means (for example, the CPU 103) that derives the display result is displayed. ,
When the display result of the normal variable display means becomes a predetermined display result (for example, a universal figure), a normal variable winning means (for example, an open state) in which the game medium can enter for a predetermined period (for example, an open state) , A variable winning ball device 6B),
And an ordinary variable winning timekeeping means (for example, a CPU 103 that keeps time with a power-chew opening time timer) for measuring a period during which the ordinary variable winning means is in an enterable state,
The normal variable winning award timing means stops the time measurement of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the normal variable winning award means is in an enterable state, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the timekeeping of the period is restarted (for example, the CPU 103 determines that the valid period of the power-chu open time timer is based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the setting confirmation state when it is open) Stop the time measurement, and restart the time measurement of the valid period of the electric Chu open time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantageous because the game progresses when the normal variable winning means is in the enterable state in the setting confirmation state. Can be prevented.

The invention 12F has been described by exemplifying the characteristic portion 10F. That is, the gaming machine according to Invention 12F,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display of identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player when a specific display is derived as a result,
The setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process) that can set any one of the setting values (for example, the setting values 1 to 3) of a plurality of stages having different degrees of advantage for the player with the setting changing operation. Part to execute)
A state control means capable of controlling a setting confirmation state capable of confirming which setting value is set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting variable value confirmation processing);
And variable display timing means (for example, the CPU 103 that counts by a special figure variation time timer) that measures the execution period of the variable display of the identification information (for example, a special symbol),
The variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the identification information is being executed, and the period based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the measurement of the effective period of the special figure variation time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is executed, and confirms the setting). Resuming the valid period of the special figure variation time timer based on the end of the state).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the identification information is variably displayed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

The invention 13F has been described by exemplifying the characteristic portion 10F. That is, the gaming machine according to Invention 13F,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display of identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when a specific display result is derived,
The setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process) that can set any one of the setting values (for example, the setting values 1 to 3) of a plurality of stages having different degrees of advantage for the player with the setting changing operation. Part to execute)
A state control means capable of controlling a setting confirmation state capable of confirming which setting value is set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting variable value confirmation processing);
A normal variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variably displays normal identification information (for example, a normal symbol) and derives a display result based on that the game medium has passed through a predetermined area (for example, the passage gate 41).
Ordinary variable display timing means for timing the execution period of the variable display of the ordinary identification information (for example, CPU 103 for timing by the universal figure variable time timer),
The ordinary variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the ordinary identification information is being performed, and based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. To restart the time measurement of the period (for example, the CPU 103 stops the time measurement of the effective period of the universal figure variation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal symbol is executed, Based on the end of the setting confirmation state, restart the clocking of the validity period of the universal figure variable time timer).

According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the variable identification information is normally displayed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 40F)
Next, the characteristic portion 40F will be described. The characteristic unit 40F has a feature regarding the processing of the effect control command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Noise may be generated due to static electricity or the like in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. In such a case, the effect control command may be unintentionally transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The processing when such an irregular command is received will be described below.

FIG. 12-1 is a diagram exemplifying an effect control command in the characteristic unit 40F in the present embodiment. The command F1XXH and the command F2XXH are effect control commands indicating the contents of the winning determination results such as the jackpot type determination and the variation pattern type determination at the time of the start winning to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. Of these, the command F1XXH is a symbol designating command that indicates whether or not a big hit is included in the winning judgment results, and the judgment result of the type of the big hit. Further, the command F2XXH is a variation type command indicating a determination result (variation pattern type determination result) of which determination value range the variation pattern type random number value is in the winning determination result.

Various effect control commands shown in FIG. 12A are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 at predetermined timing by the CPU 103. By receiving various effect control commands, the effect control CPU 120 executes various processes. A part of the various processes executed by the effect control CPU 120 based on the effect control command will be described.

(About processing based on fluctuation pattern designation command)
The effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 on the basis of the reception of the variation pattern designation command to perform the variation display of the decorative pattern to be displayed. In addition, the image display device 5 may be provided with a constant small symbol of a reduced decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol. In such a case, the effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 based on the reception of the variation pattern designation command, thereby performing the variation display of the constantly displayed small symbols.

(About processing based on the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command)
As a variable display pattern, a decorative symbol, a special symbol, and a fourth symbol may be provided as a fourth symbol following the ordinary symbol. The fourth symbol is a symbol indicating that the special symbol (first and second special symbols) is changing, for example, it is fluctuated by a certain operation in a mode that is always visible in a display device such as the image display device 5. Is displayed. By the variable display of the fourth symbol, an effect such that the effect content including the variable display of the decorative symbol disappears from the screen for a moment is performed, or the movable body covers all or part of the screen of the image display device 5. Even if it is difficult to recognize the decorative pattern, such as when an effect such as shielding is performed, it is possible to recognize whether or not the display is currently in a variable display. Based on the reception of the first variation start command, the effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 to display the variation of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol. Further, the effect control CPU 120 performs the variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol by operating the image display device 5 based on the reception of the second variation start command.

(About processing based on the designated command during the opening of the special winning opening)
During the big hit game, for example, a round game for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to an open state (first state) advantageous to the player is executed 15 times. During the round game, the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to be in the closed state (second state), which makes it difficult for the gaming ball to win the big winning opening. The effect control CPU 120 controls the special variable winning a prize ball device 7 to the open state based on the reception of the special winning opening opening designation command. Further, the effect control CPU 120 updates the display of the number of rounds in the big hit game state by operating the image display device 5 based on the reception of the special winning opening opening designation command.

(Regarding the processing based on the first start mouth winning designation command and the second start mouth winning designation command)
The effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 based on the reception of the first start opening winning award designation command, so that the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122 stores the first hold information. Display the hold display corresponding to. Further, the effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 on the basis of the reception of the second start opening winning award designation command, so that the effect control command reception buffer stored in the RAM 122 stores the second value. Display the hold display corresponding to the hold information.

(About processing based on symbol designating command, variation type designating command)
Based on the reception of the symbol designating command and the variation type designating command, the effect control CPU 120 performs a winning flash effect and a winning change change effect. The winning flash effect is an effect of causing a lamp provided around the first starting opening to emit light when a start winning occurs. The effect control CPU 120 performs the lottery for the winning flash effect based on the jackpot expectation based on the hold information by the symbol designating command and the variation type designating command. When the lottery is won, the lamp emits light in a different manner depending on the degree of expectation. Concretely, the production control CPU 120 emits red light for those with a high expectation of big hits, and white light for those with a low expectation of hits. Is controlled so that the lamp does not emit light. Further, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a sound according to the degree of expectation together with the winning flash effect. In addition, you may control not to output a sound only by light emission.

The winning-time hold change effect is an effect for changing the display mode of the hold display displayed when the start winning occurs to a mode different from the normal mode. The effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery for winning change hold effect based on the jackpot expectation based on the hold information by the symbol designating command or the variation type designating command. When the lottery is won, the hold display at the time of winning is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode. Specifically, the hold display is displayed in red, green, and blue in order from the one with the highest jackpot expectation, and the hold display is displayed in white as a normal mode in the case of being out of the lottery or out of change without reach. .. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a sound corresponding to the degree of expectation together with the winning pending change effect. In addition, you may control not to output a sound only by a hold change.

The effect control CPU 120 executes the winning flash effect by controlling the light emission of the lamp based on the reception of the symbol designating command and the variation type designating command. Further, the effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 based on the reception of the symbol designating command and the variation type designating command, thereby executing the winning-time pending change rendering. It should be noted that only one of the winning flash effect and the winning pending change effect may be executed. Further, at the time of winning the prize, the effect indicating the degree of expectation may be executed only by outputting the sound.

Next, the effect control main process executed in the characteristic unit 40F will be described. FIG. 12-2 is a flowchart showing the effect control main process in the characteristic unit 40F.

The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command has been received (207SGS411). When the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command is received (207SGS411; Y), that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting value changing state or the setting value checking state, the setting value is changed. A set value related informing process is executed to inform that the operation is in progress (informing that the set value is being changed) or that the setting value is being confirmed (informing that the set value is being confirmed) (207SGS412). In the set value related notification process, a notification image indicating that the setting variable is being updated and a notification image indicating that the setting value is being confirmed are displayed.

After the setting value related notification process is executed in 207SGS412, the sub game stop process is executed (40FS001). In the sub-side game stop processing, when the production control command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the production control CPU 120 stops the game. The process is executed. Details of the sub-side game stop processing will be described with reference to FIG. 12-3.

After the sub-side game stop processing is executed in 40FS001, it is determined whether or not the setting value change end notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command is received (207SGS416). When the setting value change end notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command is not received (207SGS416; N), the process proceeds to 207SGS412, and the setting value change end notification command and the setting value confirmation end notification command are received (207SGS416; Y). Proceeds to 207 SGS427.

FIG. 12-3 is a flowchart showing a sub-side game stop process in the characteristic unit 40F executed in 40FS001. The effect control CPU 120 stores the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by the CPU 103 in the effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122. Then, the effect control CPU 120 analyzes the command stored in the effect control command reception buffer.

In the sub-side game stop processing, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the first variation start command has been received (40FS010). When it is determined that the first fluctuation start command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS011. When it is determined that the first variation start command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The production control CPU 120 discards the first variation start command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, thereby causing the variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol by operating the image display device 5. It is possible not to execute the control to be performed. Then, the process ends.

In 40FS011, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command receiving buffer and determines whether or not the second variation start command has been received. When it is determined that the second variation start command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS012. When it is determined that the second variation start command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The production control CPU 120 discards the second variation start command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, thereby displaying the variation of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol by operating the image display device 5. It is possible not to execute the control to be performed. Then, the process ends.

In 40FS012, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command receiving buffer and determines whether or not the variation pattern designation command is received. When it is determined that the variation pattern designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS013. When it is determined that the variation pattern designation command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 discards the variation pattern designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, thereby performing the variation display of the decorative pattern by operating the image display device 5 and the variation display of the constantly small symbols. Can be prevented from running. Then, the process ends.

In 40FS013, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command receiving buffer and determines whether or not the special winning opening open designation command has been received. If it is determined that the command for opening special winning opening is not received, the process proceeds to 40FS014. When it is determined that the special winning opening open command is received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The CPU 120 for effect control updates the display of the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state by operating the image display device 5 by discarding the special winning opening opening designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. You can turn it off. Then, the process ends.

In 40FS014, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the first start winning opening designation command has been received. When it is determined that the first start winning opening designation command is not received, the process proceeds to 40FS015. When it is determined that the first start winning opening designation command is received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 does not display the hold display of the first hold information by operating the image display device 5 by discarding the first start winning opening designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. can do. Then, the process ends.

In 40FS015, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the second start winning opening designation command is received. When it is determined that the second start winning opening designation command is not received, the process proceeds to 40FS016. When it is determined that the second start winning opening designation command is received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The production control CPU 120 discards the second start winning opening designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state so that the hold display of the second hold information by operating the image display device 5 is not displayed. can do. Then, the process ends.

In 40FS016, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command receiving buffer and determines whether or not a symbol designating command has been received. If it is determined that the symbol designating command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS016. When it is determined that the symbol designating command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 can cancel the winning flash effect under the control of causing the lamp to emit light by discarding the symbol designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can prevent the winning-change-on-hold change effect by operating the image display device 5 by discarding the symbol designating command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. .. Then, the process ends.

In 40FS017, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the effect control command receiving buffer and determines whether or not the variation type designation command is received. If it is determined that the variation type designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS018. When it is determined that the fluctuation type designation command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 can avoid executing the winning flash effect under the control of causing the lamp to emit light by discarding the variation type designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Further, the effect control CPU 120 may not execute the winning-pending change effect by operating the image display device 5 by discarding the variation type designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. it can. Then, the process ends.

In 40FS018, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command receiving buffer and determines whether or not a test command has been received. Here, the test command is a command directly transmitted to the production control board 12 from a device for sending a command for confirming the state of the screen and the state of the accessory provided at the time of factory shipment. .. When transmitting the test command, various test commands are transmitted in a state in which a transmission device dedicated to transmitting the test command is connected to the effect control board 12.

If it is determined in 40FS018 that the test command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS019. When it is determined that the test command is received, the control according to the test command is executed even in the setting change state and the setting confirmation state (40FS020). For example, the effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 to perform a predetermined operation based on the reception of a test command for checking the liquid crystal of the image display device 5 during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Display the check screen. In this way, the processing based on the reception of the test command is executed even in the setting change state and the setting confirmation state. Then, the process ends.

In 40FS019, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not a command other than the setting change end notification command or the setting confirmation end notification command has been received (40FS019). These commands are, for example, the commands shown in FIG. 12-1. If it is determined that these commands have not been received, the processing ends. When it is determined that these commands have been received, the received commands are discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 can prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from performing an effect by discarding these commands during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Then, the process ends.

(About the effect of the characteristic part)
As shown in FIG. 12-3, the effect control CPU 120 discards the variation pattern designation command even if the variation pattern designation command is received while being controlled to the setting change state. Do not perform control based on reception. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state.

As shown in FIG. 12-3, the effect control CPU 120 discards the variation pattern designation command even if the variation pattern designation command is received while being controlled in the setting confirmation state. Do not perform control based on reception. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received in the setting confirmation state.

As shown in FIG. 12-3, when the effect control CPU 120 is controlled to the setting change state, even if the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command are received, the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command are received. Since the fluctuation start command is discarded, the control based on the reception of the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state.

As shown in FIG. 12-3, when the effect control CPU 120 is controlled to the setting confirmation state, even if the first variation start command and the second variation start command are received, the first variation start command and the second variation start command are received. Since the fluctuation start command is discarded, the control based on the reception of the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received in the setting confirmation state.

As shown in FIG. 12-3, the effect control CPU 120 discards the special winning opening opening specifying command even if the special winning opening opening specifying command is received while being controlled to the setting change state. The control based on the reception of the command for opening the special winning opening is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state.

As shown in FIG. 12-3, the effect control CPU 120 discards the special winning opening opening designation command even if the special winning opening opening designation command is received while being controlled to the setting confirmation state. The control based on the reception of the special winning opening designation command is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received in the setting confirmation state.

As shown in FIG. 12-3, when the effect control CPU 120 is controlled to the setting change state, even if the first start winning a prize port designation command and the second starting winning a prize port designation command are received, the first starting prize award. Since the mouth designation command and the second start winning opening designation command are discarded, the control based on the reception of the first starting winning opening designation command and the second starting winning opening designation command is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state.

As shown in FIG. 12-3, when the effect control CPU 120 is controlled to the setting confirmation state, even if the first start winning a prize opening designation command and the second starting winning a prize opening designation command are received, the first starting award winning prize. Since the mouth designation command and the second start winning opening designation command are discarded, the control based on the reception of the first starting winning opening designation command and the second starting winning opening designation command is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received in the setting confirmation state.

As shown in FIG. 12-3, the effect control CPU 120 discards the symbol designating command and the variation type command while being controlled to the setting change state, and therefore, is based on the receipt of the symbol designating command and the variation type command. Do not execute control. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the winning lamp and the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state.

As shown in FIG. 12-3, the effect control CPU 120 discards the symbol designating command and the variation type command while being controlled in the setting confirmation state, and therefore, is based on the receipt of the symbol designating command and the variation type command. Do not execute control. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the winning lamp and the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting confirmation state.

As shown in FIG. 12-3, the effect control CPU 120 analyzes the command from the CPU 103, but thereafter discards the received command as in 40FS021. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Further, since the received command is discarded and no information remains, even if the setting change state or the setting confirmation state ends, no erroneous command remains and no malfunction is executed.

As shown in FIG. 12-2, based on the reception of the setting value change start notification command, the setting for displaying the image notifying that the setting is being changed is received, and the setting value confirmation start notification command is received. Based on the above, the setting for displaying the image notifying that the setting confirmation state is set is made. By doing so, it is possible to indicate that the control is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, and even if the irregular display command is received in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the image display device 5 or the like. It is possible to prevent the predetermined rendering means from malfunctioning.

As indicated by 40FS020 in FIG. 12C, the control according to the test command is executed even when the control is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. With this configuration, even when the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is controlled, it is possible to execute the operation of the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 based on the test command.

(Regarding the modified example of the characteristic part)
The characteristic portion 40F has been described above with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and the present invention is not limited to modifications and additions without departing from the scope of the present invention. included. Below, the modification of the characteristic part 40F is demonstrated.

In the above-described embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the analysis of the effect control command receiving buffer for each command transmitted while being controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. However, instead of sequentially analyzing the commands and discarding them one by one, all the commands stored in the effect control command receiving buffer may be discarded when a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, the CPU 103 may send an initialization command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 based on the end of the setting change state. Then, based on the reception of the initialization command, all the commands stored in the effect control command reception buffer may be discarded. Further, even in the setting confirmation state, all the commands stored in the effect control command receiving buffer may be discarded based on the reception of the predetermined command.

In the embodiment described above, when the control based on the effect control command is not executed even when the effect control command other than the command related to the setting change or the setting check is received while being controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. explained. However, the processing based on the reception of the effect control command while the control is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state may be internally executed. Even in such a case, the control executed when being controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state has a higher priority than the control based on the reception of the other effect control command. On the screen of the image display device 5, an image according to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is visually displayed. Regarding the sound, during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, channels other than the channel outputting the notification sound during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state may be muted.

In the above-described embodiment, the process of analyzing the command received when the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is controlled is executed. However, when the command is received in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the analysis may not be performed even if the command is received.

In the above-described embodiment, the image display device 5 and the lamp at the time of winning the prize have been described as the predetermined effect means operated by the effect control CPU 120 when the effect control command is received. However, the predetermined effect means may be any one as long as the effect control means 120 is executed based on the reception of the command. For example, the operation means operated by the player or a movable member provided in the game machine may be used as the predetermined effect means. In such a case, when the operation means vibrates or the movable member operates due to the reception of a predetermined command, commands for executing these operations are received during the setting change state and the setting confirmation state. Even if it is done, the control for discarding the command may be executed.

In the above-described embodiment, a command other than the command for ending the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, such as the setting value change end notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command, is received during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. You may control not to do it.

In the above-described embodiment, a lamp provided in the gaming machine may be caused to emit light or sound may be output from a speaker together with the control for operating the image display device 5. In such a case, the command may be discarded when a command related to the lamp or the speaker is received so that the effect means does not operate during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state.

In the above-described embodiment, the case has been described in which the notice production based on the reception of the symbol designating command or the variation type command is executed. However, the notice effect to be executed may be executed by receiving one of the commands, and when the command related to the variation pattern command is transmitted due to the occurrence of the start winning, the command related to the variation pattern is executed. You may make it perform a notice production based on. In such a case, even if a command related to the variation pattern is received during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the command may be discarded.

In the above-described embodiment, the advance notice lottery to be executed may be executed based on the symbol designating command or the variation type command being received during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Then, various types of advance notice may not be executed by determining that the advance notice is not executable at the timing of determining whether or not the advance notice is actually executable. Also, when executing the pre-reading notice effect in continuous variable display other than when winning, the notice lottery is executed based on receipt of the symbol designating command or variation type command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. However, if the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is finished at the timing of actually starting the advance notice, the advance notice may be executed based on the received command.

In the above-described embodiment, the case where the command received in the processing of 40FS021 in 40FS001 is discarded has been described. However, the timing of discarding the received command may be the timing after it is determined that the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command is received (207SGS416; Y). By doing this, when a plurality of irregular commands are received, the commands can be discarded at once.

In the above-described embodiment, when an irregular command is received once during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, a restriction may be applied so that another irregular command is not received thereafter. Good.

(Explanation regarding the association of the characteristic parts)
Each configuration related to the characteristic part may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to another characteristic part. The feature parts combined in this way or the individual feature parts that are not combined may be appropriately combined with a part or all of the respective configurations relating to the other feature parts.

The embodiments disclosed this time are to be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description but by the claims, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the claims and all modifications within the scope.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 Game effect lamp 10 General prize hole 11 Main board 12 Production control board 13 Voice control board 14 Lamp control board 15 Relay board 20 Normal pattern display 21 Gate switch 22A, 22B Start opening Switch 23... Count switch 30... Hitting ball operation handle 31A... Stick controller 31B... Push button 32... Movable body 100... Game control microcomputers 101, 121... ROM
102, 122... RAM
103... CPU
104, 124... Random number circuits 105, 125... I/O
120... CPU for production control
123... Display control unit

Claims (3)

A gaming machine capable of executing variable display and controllable in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
After the end of the advantageous state, state control means capable of controlling to a specific state for at least a specific period,
Setting means that can set variable display time,
Equipped with
The specific period includes a first period, a second period after the first period, and a third period after the second period,
The setting means,
The first variable display time can be set at a higher rate in the first period than in the second period,
In the second period, a second variable display time longer than the first variable display time can be set at a higher rate than the first period and the third period,
It is possible to set a third variable display time that is longer than the first variable display time and shorter than the second variable display time at a higher rate than the first period and the second period in the third period.
further,
As the advantageous state, a game state control means capable of controlling at least one of a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state,
End effect selecting means for selecting a longer period as the end effect period at the end of the advantageous condition at a higher rate in the first advantageous state than in the second advantageous state,
And a finish production execution means capable of executing a finish production in the finish production period,
The end time effect executing means is capable of executing any one of a plurality of kinds of end time effects during the end time effect period in the first advantageous state,
An end time effect that can be accepted from the player to select an end time effect executed by the end time effect execution means from among a plurality of kinds of end time effects that can be executed in the end effect time period of the first advantageous state. Further comprising reception means,
A gaming machine characterized by that. A gaming machine capable of executing variable display and controllable in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
After the end of the advantageous state, state control means capable of controlling to a specific state for at least a specific period,
Setting means that can set variable display time,
Equipped with
The specific period includes a first period, a second period after the first period, and a third period after the second period,
The setting means,
The first variable display time can be set at a higher rate in the first period than in the second period,
In the second period, a second variable display time longer than the first variable display time can be set at a higher rate than the first period and the third period,
It is possible to set a third variable display time that is longer than the first variable display time and shorter than the second variable display time at a higher rate than the first period and the second period in the third period.
further,
At least one of a normal state, a special state different from the advantageous state after the end of the advantageous state, a first advantageous state as the advantageous state, and a second advantageous state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. A game state control means that can be controlled to
Compared to the case of controlling to the advantageous state when controlled to the normal state, the case of controlling to the advantageous state when controlled to the special state is at the end of the advantageous state. End effect selecting means for selecting a long period at a high rate as the end effect period,
And a finish production execution means capable of executing a finish production in the finish production period,
The game state control means controllable to the special state includes the state control means controllable to the specific state,
The end time effect executing means is capable of executing any one of a plurality of kinds of end time effects during the end time effect period in the first advantageous state,
An end time effect that can be accepted from the player to select an end time effect executed by the end time effect execution means from among a plurality of kinds of end time effects that can be executed in the end effect time period of the first advantageous state. Further comprising reception means,
A gaming machine characterized by that. A gaming machine capable of executing variable display and controllable in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
After the end of the advantageous state, state control means capable of controlling to a specific state for at least a specific period,
Setting means that can set variable display time,
Equipped with
The specific period includes a first period, a second period after the first period, and a third period after the second period,
The setting means,
The first variable display time can be set at a higher rate in the first period than in the second period,
In the second period, a second variable display time longer than the first variable display time can be set at a higher rate than the first period and the third period,
It is possible to set a third variable display time that is longer than the first variable display time and shorter than the second variable display time at a higher rate than the first period and the second period in the third period.
further,
As the special identification information, it is possible to execute variable display of the first special identification information and the second special identification information which is more advantageous to the player than the first special identification information,
First reserved storage means capable of storing information regarding variable display of the first special identification information as first reserved storage information;
Second reserved storage means capable of storing information on the variable display of the second special identification information as second reserved storage information;
When the first reserved storage information and the second reserved storage information are both stored, the variable display of the second special identification information based on the second reserved storage information is changed to the variable display of the first special identification information. Variable display control means to be executed with priority over display,
As the advantageous state, a game state control means capable of controlling at least one of a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state,
The advantageous state is controlled when the advantageous state is controlled as a result of the variable display of the second reserved storage information, rather than when the advantageous state is controlled as a result of the variable display of the first reserved storage information. End production selection means for selecting a long period at a high rate as the end production period at the end of,
And a finish production execution means capable of executing a finish production in the finish production period,
The variable display control means includes the setting means,
The end time effect executing means is capable of executing any one of a plurality of kinds of end time effects during the end time effect period in the first advantageous state,
An end time effect that can be accepted from the player to select an end time effect executed by the end time effect execution means from among a plurality of kinds of end time effects that can be executed in the end effect time period of the first advantageous state. Further comprising reception means,
A gaming machine characterized by that.